JP6616807B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As what is generally known as this type of gaming machine, there is one that performs variable display (also referred to as variable display). As such a gaming machine, there is one that performs a pre-reading determination on a variable display that has not yet been started and performs a pre-reading effect as a specific effect according to the determination result. In addition, there is a technique that performs a pseudo-continuous effect using a so-called pseudo-continuous variation that repeats an operation of re-varying after temporarily stopping a symbol during one variation, so that a plurality of variations are performed.

  When executing these pre-reading effects and pseudo-continuous effects, there is one that changes the background (see, for example, Patent Document 1). By performing pre-reading effects and pseudo-continuous effects, the feeling of expectation controlled to an advantageous state is enhanced. In addition, the expectation is further enhanced by changing the background image when performing the pre-reading effect or the pseudo-continuous effect.

JP 2013-146506 A

  However, in the case of the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above, in the case where the background image is changed along with the execution of the pre-reading effect or the pseudo-continuous effect, it is sufficient that the expectation level to be controlled to the advantageous state is high. There was something that could not be emphasized.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of highlighting that the degree of expectation controlled to an advantageous state is high.

( A ) A gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like)
Specific effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 101 or the like) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone notice effect) that suggests a transition to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. )When,
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, CPU 101 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing different types of predetermined effects (for example, BGM effects such as normal BGM effects, zone BGM effects, super BGM effects, etc.);
A notification effect execution means (for example, a control CPU 101 for effect control) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) as to whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
Command (e.g., effect control command) and a control means for performing control on the basis of (e.g., effect control microcomputer 90100),
Receives a plurality of command data constituting a command, the first storage area (e.g., reception register the serial communication circuit 90115 comprises) comprises a command receiving means for storing in a,
The control means includes
The received interrupt command receiving means is generated each time receiving a command data (e.g., serial reception interrupt) based on, stored in the second storage area by reading the command data stored in said first storage area First storage control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S90721 to S90723 in the production control microcomputer 90100);
Second storage control means (for example, effect control) for reading out command data stored in the second storage area and storing it in the third storage area based on a timer interrupt generated every predetermined period (for example, 1 ms) Part of the microcomputer 90100 for executing steps S90741 to S90748),
Analyzing means for analyzing the command data stored in the third storage area (for example, a part for executing step S90704 in the production control microcomputer 90100),
The second storage control means determines the type of command data read from the second storage area, and sets the command data to an area according to the type of command data in the third storage area based on the determination result. Store and
The second storage area has a larger storage capacity than the first storage area,
The third storage area has a larger storage capacity than the second storage area,
The reception interrupt is set higher in priority than the timer interrupt,
The predetermined effect execution means includes
In response to the execution of the specific effect, the execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started (for example, the zone BGM effect is executed when the zone notice effect is executed). The predetermined effect (for example, the zone) corresponding to the specific effect in accordance with the end of the notification effect executed after the effect (for example, the end of the super reach effect executed after the zone notice effect is executed). A first pattern that terminates execution of the zone BGM effect corresponding to the notice effect (for example, ends the zone BGM effect in response to the end of the super reach effect that is executed after the zone notice effect is executed);
The execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the notification effect executed after the specific effect is being executed (for example, the zone notice effect is executed) In response to the execution of a special effect that suggests the transition to the advantageous state (for example, an effect effect in which the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation, etc.) changing the type of the predetermined effect Te (eg, switches the BGM effect output from the speaker 27 from the zone BGM effect super BGM effect), wherein the second pattern, it is possible to perform.
According to such a configuration, it can be emphasized that the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is higher, and the interest can be improved.

(1) Other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
Specific effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 101 or the like) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone notice effect) that suggests a transition to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. )When,
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, CPU 101 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing different types of predetermined effects (for example, BGM effects such as normal BGM effects, zone BGM effects, super BGM effects, etc.);
A notification effect execution means (for example, a control CPU 101 for effect control) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) as to whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
Control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90100) that performs control based on the received command (for example, an effect control command);
A first storage area (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) in which a received command is first stored;
A second storage area in which received commands are temporarily stored (for example, a transfer buffer provided in the internal RAM 90112);
A third storage area (for example, an analysis buffer provided in an external SDRAM 90116) in which received commands are finally stored;
With
The control means includes
First storage control means for reading a command stored in the first storage area and storing it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt (for example, serial reception interrupt) that occurs every time a command is received (For example, the part that executes steps S90721 to S90723 in the production control microcomputer 90100),
Second storage control means (for example, effect control) for reading a command stored in the second storage area and storing it in the third storage area based on a timer interrupt generated every predetermined period (for example, 1 ms) Part of the microcomputer 90100 for executing steps S90741 to S90748),
Analyzing means for analyzing the command stored in the third storage area (for example, a part for executing step S90704 in the production control microcomputer 90100),
The predetermined effect execution means includes
In response to the execution of the specific effect, the execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started (for example, the zone BGM effect is executed when the zone notice effect is executed). The predetermined effect (for example, the zone) corresponding to the specific effect in accordance with the end of the notification effect executed after the effect (for example, the end of the super reach effect executed after the zone notice effect is executed). A first pattern that terminates execution of the zone BGM effect corresponding to the notice effect (for example, ends the zone BGM effect in response to the end of the super reach effect that is executed after the zone notice effect is executed);
The execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the notification effect executed after the specific effect is being executed (for example, the zone notice effect is executed) In response to the execution of a special effect that suggests the transition to the advantageous state (for example, an effect effect in which the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation, etc.) A second pattern that changes the type of the predetermined effect (for example, the BGM effect output from the speaker 27 is switched from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect);
Can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it can be emphasized that the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is higher, and the interest can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above,
The specific effect can be executed according to the passing of the game medium to a winning device (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the like) through which the game medium can pass (for example, a zone advance notice when winning to the first starting winning opening 13) For example, performing an effect).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a situation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is high in accordance with the passage of the game medium to the winning device.

(3) The gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Decision means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for deciding whether or not to control to the above-mentioned advantageous state at the start of variation;
Determination means (for example, the CPU 101 for production control) that determines whether or not to be controlled to be in an advantageous state before the start of the determination target variation (for example, target variation) of the determination means,
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, executing the first zone notice effect as a zone notice effect),
The specific effects include an introduction effect (for example, a zone notice effect during shutter closing) and a main effect (for example, a zone notice effect after shutter release),
The specific effect execution means can execute the introduction effect (for example, until the target change is started) in the change before the change of the determination target of the determination means (for example, the change before the target change is started). The zone notice effect during the shutter closing is executed, etc.), and the main effect can be executed during the change of the determination target of the determining means (for example, the zone notice effect after the shutter is released during the target change). There may be.

  According to such a structure, the expectation controlled to an advantageous state can be maintained for a long time, and an interest can be improved.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect with a change of 1 (for example, can execute a second zone notification effect of executing a zone closing effect during shutter closing and a zone notification effect after opening the shutter with a target change). And
The introduction effect and the main effect can be continuously executed with a change of 1 (for example, in the second zone notice effect, the zone notice effect during shutter closing and the zone notice effect after opening the shutter are continuously provided with a change of 1). Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest.

(5) The gaming machine according to any of (1) to (4) above,
The specific effect execution means can execute an effect of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a shutter image) having a high display priority (for example, a small Z value assigned to a plurality of display layers) as the introduction effect ( For example, a zone notice effect that displays a shutter image)
Regardless of whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the variation before the variation start of the determination target of the determination means (for example, the variation before the target variation is started),
An execution lottery corresponding to an effect with a low display priority (for example, an effect executed in a layer with a large Z value assigned to a plurality of display layers) is possible (for example, a zone notice effect in which a shutter image is displayed is executed) Regardless of whether or not it is performed, a reach effect or the like may be executed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displayed predetermined image.

(6) Any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The specific effect execution means can perform a predetermined display (for example, a special background image or the like) corresponding to the specific effect during execution of the specific effect.
Even when the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect ends during the notification effect (for example, when the zone BGM effect ends during the super reach effect), the predetermined display is continuously displayed during the notification effect. May be displayed (for example, a special background image is displayed in the super reach effect after the zone notice effect).

  According to such a configuration, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect has been executed.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Movable body effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 101, etc.) capable of executing a movable object effect (for example, an effect effect in which the effect object 60 tilts) as the special effect,
The movable body effect execution means can perform an effect using the same movable body as the specific effect before the specific effect is executed (for example, an effect effect is executed during a normal reach effect). Then, the type of the predetermined effect may not be switched (for example, the BGM effect is not switched from the normal BGM effect or the zone BGM effect even if the accessory effect is executed during the normal reach).

  According to such a configuration, since the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the situation in which the movable body effect is executed is executed, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in expectation while increasing the execution frequency of the movable object effect. Can do.

(8) The gaming machine according to any of (1) to (7) above,
Prefetch determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that performs prefetch determination on a variation display that has not yet been started (for example, a variation display stored as on-hold storage information);
In response to execution of the prefetch effect by the prefetch effect means, predetermined notification means for executing a predetermined notification (for example, pre-read notification by displaying the pre-read notification image 94),
The specific effect executing means may include, as the specific effect, a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, a pending change notice, etc.) according to the determination result of the prefetch determination by the prefetch determination means. Pre-reading effect etc.) can be executed before the start of the fluctuation display of the pre-reading determination target (for example, the fluctuation display of the target fluctuation, etc.)
The predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification in a common mode (for example, a common image display mode such as the pre-read notification image 94) regardless of the type of the specific effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the execution of the prefetching effect by executing the common notification effect.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following means A1 to means A6. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a reception register (FIFO) is monitored at a certain period of time as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-248158, and a reception register using a timer interrupt in normal reception processing. A gaming machine that takes out data stored in (FIFO) and performs registration processing in a command buffer (analysis buffer) is known. However, in such a gaming machine, when a large number of commands are received, the reception register (FIFO) becomes full, and there is a possibility that the command may be missed. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can reduce missed commands when a large number of commands are received.

(Means A1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and performs control based on a received command (for example, an effect control command). (For example, a production control microcomputer 90100), a first storage area (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) in which the received command is first stored, and a second storage in which the received command is temporarily stored. An area (for example, a transfer buffer provided in the internal RAM 90112) and a third storage area (for example, an analysis buffer provided in the external SDRAM 90116) in which received commands are finally stored; , Based on a receive interrupt (for example, a serial receive interrupt) that occurs each time a command is received First storage control means for reading a command stored in the storage area and storing it in the second storage area (for example, a part for executing steps S90721 to S90723 in the production control microcomputer 90100), and a predetermined period (for example, 1 ms) ) Based on a timer interrupt generated every time, a second storage control means for reading the command stored in the second storage area and storing it in the third storage area (for example, step S90741 in the production control microcomputer 90100). And a means for analyzing the command stored in the third storage area (for example, a part for executing step S90704 in the effect control microcomputer 90100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce missed commands when a large number of commands are received.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the second storage area is provided in the RAM built in the control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, a transfer buffer is provided in the built-in RAM 90112). May be. According to such a configuration, the command can be transferred from the first storage area to the second storage area at high speed.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or A2, the first storage control means reads the command stored in the first storage area based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of reception interrupts (for example, 10 times). (For example, in the modification shown in FIG. 76, the production control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S90721 to S90723 when it is determined as Y in step S90752). May be. According to such a configuration, the processing time for each interrupt is shortened by performing the process of transferring the command from the first storage area to the second storage area only once every time a reception interrupt occurs a predetermined number of times. can do.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the second storage area has a larger storage capacity than the first storage area, and the third storage area stores compared to the second storage area. The capacity is large (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is 16 bytes, whereas the capacity of the transfer buffer is as large as 128 bytes, and the analysis buffer (upper) and The capacity of the analysis buffer (lower level) may be as large as 256 bytes each). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce missed commands by increasing the storage capacity of the transfer destination storage area.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the second storage control means determines that the capacity of the command stored in the second storage area has reached the maximum value of the storage capacity of the second storage area. In this case, regardless of the occurrence of the timer interrupt, the command stored in the second storage area is read and stored in the third storage area (for example, it is determined as Y in step S90724 in the production control microcomputer 90100). (Sometimes when executing steps S90725 to S90734). According to such a configuration, when the second storage area is full, it is possible to reduce the missed command by moving the command to the third storage area even a little.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1 to A5, the third storage area stores the first area (for example, the analysis buffer (upper)) for storing the upper data of the command and the lower data of the command. And the second storage control means stores the upper data of the command read from the second storage area in the first area (for example, the effect control micro). The computer 90100 executes step S90745), and stores the lower-order data of the command read from the second storage area in the second area (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes step S90746). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce missed commands in the second storage area.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a prefetch effect type table showing the relationship between the type of prefetch effect, the contents of the prefetch effect, and the start time of the prefetch effect. It is a display screen figure of the production | presentation display apparatus for demonstrating prefetching production | presentation. It is a display screen figure of the production | presentation display apparatus which shows the notification completion | finish effect in the pre-reading notification for ending the notification in pre-reading when the notification in pre-reading is performed. It is a display screen figure of the effect display apparatus for demonstrating a zone notice effect. An example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the effect display device is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows the various determination tables for determining whether a prefetch effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the prefetch effect execution start variation selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for production control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reception command buffer + effect buffer at the time of a start winning prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reception command buffer data designation | designated content at the time of a start winning prize. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between prefetching production | presentation and alerting | reporting in prefetching. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows a zone notice effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process A. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing B. It is a table | surface which shows an effect pattern after shutter opening. It is a time chart which shows the production mode of the 1st zone notice effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 1st zone notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the production mode of the 2nd zone notice effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of 2nd zone notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the production mode of the 3rd zone notice effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 3rd zone notice effect. It is a time chart which shows the effect aspect in case a 1st zone notice effect is performed by the effect pattern 3. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the effect aspect in case a 1st zone notice effect is performed by the effect pattern 1. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the effect aspect in case a 1st zone notice effect is performed by the effect pattern 2. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the effect aspect in case a zone notice effect is performed by the effect pattern 6. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect effect setting process. It is a display screen figure of effect display performed according to effect effect setting processing in the effect display device. It is a figure which shows the example of a display with an effect display apparatus in case an adjustment result image is displayed during a predetermined effect. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interruption process in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the microcomputer for production control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map in the microcomputer for production control. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the interruption control register for serial reception interruption setting, and an example of setting content. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure example and setting content of the interrupt control register for a timer interrupt setting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of 1 structure of a receiving register and each receiving buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the 1ms timer interruption process in the microcomputer for production control. It is a flowchart which shows the buffer transfer process for delivery. It is a flowchart which shows the buffer transfer process for analysis. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the buffer transfer process for delivery.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine or a slot machine. Any game machine may be used.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball, and the like. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). A stick controller 122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that can be instructed is provided.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example. As operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. In the game area 7, the first path among the downflow paths through which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device when viewed from the front, and the first of the downflow paths through which the game balls flow down. A second route different from the route is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

  Driving the game ball into the left area of the effect display device 9 to cause the game ball to flow down on the first path is called left-handed. Driving the game ball into the right area of the effect display device 9 to cause the game ball to flow down on the second path is called right-handed.

  Note that the first route and the second route may be configured by completely different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The first route may be called a left-handed route because the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area 7. In addition, the second route may be called a right-handed route because the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area 7.

  A movable effect member 60 is provided in the vicinity of a predetermined edge in the display area of the effect display device 9 (here, in the vicinity of the right side). The movable effect member 60 tilts toward the left side of FIG. 1 with the lower end portion as a fulcrum on the effect display device 9 side by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 61 shown in FIG. A production model that advances to the front of the display area is configured. That is, the movable effect member 60 can be changed between a non-tilting state extending in the vertical direction and the above-described tilting state by rotational driving of the motor 61 for the movable effect member shown in FIG.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display 8 a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and a plurality of types that can identify each of them. And a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as the identification information.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9 and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and displays various images such as a variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the display screen. An area is provided. In such a display area, a symbol display area (also referred to as a symbol display area) for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” is formed. .

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display 8b performs the second display. When the special symbol variation display is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  When the jackpot display result (bonus symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derived display is performed, the effect display device 9 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) The pattern is stopped, tilted, enlarged, reduced, or deformed in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols may fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol may be switched. An effect that is performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are synchronously changing while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a background image (hereinafter simply referred to as “background”) of the effect display device 9 is displayed. The display mode (for example, color) may be changed. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set such that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than normal reach (normal reach). Such a special reach is called super reach. In addition, the reach includes a normal reach, which is a basic reach, as a reach other than a special super reach. Normal reach is set so that big hits are less likely to occur than super reach.

  In this embodiment, in super reach, after a reach symbol is formed, after a predetermined moving image (for example, a moving image such as a predetermined character moving image) is displayed, in a final effect display before display result derivation display A complicated effect display that improves the player's expectation, such as an effect of scrolling a medium effect symbol during fluctuation, is executed. Also, in normal reach, after the reach symbol is formed, the type of the background image (the image that constitutes the background of the symbol) is not different from the image that was displayed before reaching the reach state without displaying the above-mentioned moving image. A relatively simple presentation display is executed. In such a normal reach, for example, in the scroll state before the stop display of the last stop symbol of the middle symbol, for example, the effect of decelerating the variable display speed from the symbol before any symbol number (number of symbol arrangements) such as three symbols before As a result, the final effect display before the display result derivation display is performed. In the normal reach, other effect display may be performed.

  After reaching the reach state, when a reach display result other than the jackpot display result is obtained in a form in which the reach symbol is formed, it is called reach reach. In addition, when a reach display result is obtained in a mode in which a reach pattern is not formed without being in a reach state, this is called non-reach shift.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a. The time detected by the first start opening switch 13a corresponds to when a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or when the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening 13.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is provided with a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (so-called electric tulips) that can be electrically opened and closed at the upper part of the second start winning opening 14, and when the movable wing pieces are in a closed state, It becomes a disadvantageous state for a player who cannot enter, and when the movable wing piece is in an open state, the state is controlled so as to be advantageous for a player who can enter a game ball. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the winning ball may be difficult (that is, the gaming ball is difficult to win) although it is difficult to win.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured so as to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a gate 32 is provided that allows the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 10 to be displayed in a variable manner based on the passage of the game ball. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state based on the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 10, the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 than the first starting winning port 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize. Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition) which is the execution condition of the variation display is established (for example, the game ball is After passing through the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as a start winning area (including winning), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0) The first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable display, and the big hit game is not executed), and the variable display time (variable time) is set. When the time elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information). Further, regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not yet established even though the game ball has entered the start area such as the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, within a predetermined upper limit range. Storing information is called pending storage. The term “holding storage” is also used when indicating (specifying) information stored on hold (referred to as “holding storage information” or “holding information”). In this way, the hold display is to display a variable display that has not yet started as a hold display.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, The first start condition that enables the display of the variation of one special symbol is established), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 In step S, the variation display of the effect design is started. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the first start winning opening 13 can win a game ball from the first path on the left side of the effect display device 9 according to the manner of arrangement of the game nails provided in the game area 7. However, it is impossible to win a game ball from the second route on the right side of the effect display device 9. Therefore, it is possible to win a game ball to the first start winning opening 13 only when the player has left-handed.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2) The second start condition that allows the variable symbol display to start is established), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 In step S, the variation display of the effect design is started. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the second start winning opening 14 has a first route on the left side of the effect display device 9 and a second route on the right side of the effect display device 9 depending on the arrangement of the game nails provided in the game area 7. It is possible to win game balls from both. However, since the gate 32 used as a condition for executing the normal symbol variation display, which is a condition for opening the second start winning opening 14, is provided on the second path on the right side of the effect display device 9, the second When aiming for a winning at the start winning opening 14, it is necessary to strike the game ball to the right and aim for passage to the gate 32. Therefore, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 mainly from the second path when the player strikes the right.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. Variation display of the effect design as the design of. The variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol are synchronized. The variation display of the second special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol are synchronized. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the combination of effect symbols reminiscent of the jackpot display is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9.

  In addition, on the lower end portion in the display area of the effect display device 9, an image for displaying the generated stored storage information (hereinafter referred to as a stored image or display) is displayed in correspondence with the number of the stored storage information. A display area is formed (not shown, hold display area 18c in FIG. 16). In the hold display area, the hold storage information is displayed in a format in which the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number are distinguished. For example, in the effect display device 9, the first reserved memory number is displayed in the left reserved display area, and the second reserved memory number is displayed in the right reserved display area. By distinguishing and displaying the first hold display area and the second hold display area, the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information can be easily distinguished.

  An image (hereinafter referred to as an active image or an active display) showing a fluctuation corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuation display during execution of the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold display erased (moved or shifted) from the hold display area. Is formed in the center of the hold display area (not shown, variable display active display area AHA in FIG. 16). In the active display area, it is specified that the hold image displayed in the hold display area corresponds to the hold image displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image is displayed in a possible manner. The active display area may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  In the hold display area, the hold storage information may be displayed in a display form in which the first hold display area and the second hold display area are not distinguished from each other. Such a summed pending storage display makes it easy to grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and is in an open state advantageous for the player (advantageous when the game ball can be won), and a closed state advantageous for the player (advantageous because the game ball cannot be awarded). ) Can be opened and closed. A specific gaming state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b When the open / close plate is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid 21 in the (big hit game state), the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round. The repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variation time after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of releases in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or When the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the closed state is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability change state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state that is not the probability change state) as the special gaming state. The type (type) of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability jackpot”. The special gaming state may be controlled to a short time state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened from the non-short time state in association with the probability variation state. Note that the special game state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability change state.

  As the probability variation jackpot, the following first probability variation jackpot and second probability variation jackpot may be selectable. The first probability variation jackpot is allowed up to a relatively large number of times (for example, 15 times) the number of times a big prize opening is opened in the big hit gaming state, and the opening time of the big prize opening is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds). It is. The second probability variation jackpot is allowed up to a relatively small number (for example, two times) of opening the grand prize opening in the big hit gaming state, and the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). Is. The first probable big hit shifts to a promiscuous state through a big hit gaming state in which the big prize opening is opened in an open manner that is easy for the player to visually recognize. On the other hand, the second probability variation jackpot shifts to a probability variation state through a jackpot gaming state in which the big prize opening is opened in an open manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Such second probability variation jackpot is a probability variation jackpot that makes it seem as if the player suddenly entered a certain probability variation state by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the open state of the big prize opening. ", And also abbreviated as" accuracy ".

  Since the transition time to the short-time state shortens the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol, when the short-time state is reached, an effective start winning is likely to occur and the possibility of being controlled by the big hit game is increased. Of the big hits, the type (type) of the big hit that does not shift to the probable change state after being controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state is called “ordinary big hit”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable prize ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency that the variable prize ball device 15 is opened in association with the probability change state or the short time state. There are cases where the control is performed in an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approaching and higher frequency) in the variable winning ball apparatus 15. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as will be described later, in the following description, it is mainly referred to as a high base state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 15 is open is higher than when the control is not performed. As a result, the game ball is likely to start and win (the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are more likely to satisfy the variable display execution condition). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 14 is increased, so that a gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the execution frequency of the variation display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency at the second start winning opening 14 is increased by the electric Chu support control is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 15, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  The terms “low accuracy low base state” and “high accuracy high base state” are used as terms indicating a combination of the big hit probability state and the base state. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  When controlled to the high probability state, the time-short state and the high base state are controlled, but the time-short state and the high base state have the same control start condition and end condition. The controlled state may be representatively indicated by the term short time state and may be indicated by the term high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment has a configuration in which a game ball can enter the first start winning opening 13 only from the first path on the left side of the effect display device 9, and therefore the second start winning than the high base state. In a low base state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the mouth 14, the player generally makes a left-handed strike to execute a special symbol variation display by aiming for the game ball to enter the first start winning opening 13. Is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the gate 32 is provided on the second path on the right side of the effect display device 9, it is easier to allow the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 than in the low base state. In a high base state, a player generally makes a special symbol change display by making a right strike and aiming for a game ball to enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14.

  Therefore, in a low base state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 than in the high base state, the player aims to enter the first start winning opening 13 by making a left strike. Since it is general, only the first hold memory is likely to occur, and as the hold display, only the hold image corresponding to the first hold memory is mainly displayed. On the other hand, in a high base state where it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 than in a low base state, the player hits the right and aims to enter the game ball into the second start winning opening 14. Due to the generality, only the second reserved memory is likely to occur, and as the reserved display, only the reserved image corresponding to the second reserved memory is mainly displayed.

  The game balls may be allowed to enter the first start winning opening 13 from both the first route and the second route. In addition, the game ball may be allowed to enter the second start winning opening 14 only from the second route. Further, the gate 32 may be provided on the first route on the left side of the effect display device 9, and both the first route on the left side of the effect display device 9 and the second route on the right side of the effect display device 9. May be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state. Normally, in the big hit, the non-probable change state continues for the period until the next big hit occurs, the condition that the short-time state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times, such as 100 fluctuation displays, and the next big hit It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of, occurs.

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time-short state, and the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the jackpot gaming state. In the probabilistic big hit, such a high-precise base state is satisfied, whichever is earlier, a condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or a condition that the next big hit occurs. It continues for a period until.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. The main board 31 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 560 for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created by a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the production control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 controls display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 provides an effect control command for instructing effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that allows signals to pass only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. And display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, or from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Various production controls are performed by controlling the sound output.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 121 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 17 for driving the movable effect member motor 61 for operating the movable effect member 60 (see FIG. 1) is provided on the effect control board 80. Is also connected.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 4 shows the type of random number, the update range, the usage, and the addition condition. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In addition, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). To determine the variation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves reach.

  When the display result is out of order, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is in the short-time state or not in the short-time state. When this is the case, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time-short state is not, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when the time is not short, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected more frequently, and even when the reach type is selected, the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time is shorter than when not in the time-short state.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to make a big jackpot (normal jackpot or probable big hit) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5 (B) shows a case where a jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as a first holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the first start winning opening 13 (a variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). 1 is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when FIG. 5 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as a second holding memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (the second special symbol variable display is displayed). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1), the type of jackpot is determined to be either “normal jackpot” or “probable variation jackpot”, and is also referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5B is a numerical value to be compared with a random 1 value, and is a determination value corresponding to each of “normal jackpot” and “probability variable jackpot” (jackpot type determination) Value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probable variation jackpot” (jackpot type judgment). Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value having the same random 1 value as the jackpot type, and also determines the jackpot symbol having the same random 1 value as the jackpot symbol. To do. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5C have the same ratio determined for probability variation jackpots. In such a case, the big hit type determination table may not be divided between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when the big hit type is selected from a plurality of types of big hits having different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. You may set so that the ratio by which the big hit type with many round numbers is selected becomes higher than the 1st special symbol big hit type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the big hit type selection is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5C may have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B. . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can be more likely to be a big hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern in a table format.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a determination table for when the normal state is shifted, and (b) shows a determination table for when the time-short state is shifted. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table that indicates the relationship between random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between random 3 and each variation pattern for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  Further, “normal reach” in each table of FIG. 6 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 30 seconds to 60 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (the big win becomes the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach). (Possibility) is high.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined effect is produced in the effect display device 9 until the display result is derived and displayed after the variation display of each of the effect symbol as identification information and the first and second special symbols is started. There is a case where an effect called a pseudo-continuous effect (hereinafter referred to as a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed. A pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed instead of a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. The temporary stop and re-variation are executed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, and right). For example, the greater the number of repeated re-executions (the total number of changes including the initial change and subsequent re-changes, also referred to as the pseudo-variable number of times), the greater the reliability of the big hit (the difference from the big hit) The ratio of the ratio that is selected when the jackpot is large, the ratio of the ratio that is jackpot, that is, the degree of reliability that is the jackpot) is increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when the jackpot is determined to be high suggests whether or not the jackpot gaming state is to be achieved by a pseudo-continuous effect. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a pseudo-continuous design (for example, a symbol (numerical number) attached with a predetermined character or character, etc., which is not included in the effect design that is normally displayed in a variation (basically variation display) on the effect display device 9 )) Are temporarily stopped. It should be noted that in the quasi-continuation, the effect symbol (numerical symbol in the present embodiment) that normally displays variation (basically variation display) may be temporarily stopped. The combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 9 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo consecutive eyes (pseudo consecutive chances)) consisting of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. What should I do?

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, there may be an effect that the effect symbol slides. Here, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display. In the second super reach, the reach appearance (reach) is reached by stopping after one of the two production symbols that have been temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas due to a slippage (combination of the symbols). The effect is such that a reach effect is executed.

  Note that the variation pattern shown in the loss determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “out”. The variation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of “probability variation jackpot”.

  Based on this information, for example, the variation pattern “fourth super reach (60 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that the variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds.

  In the table of FIG. 6, “Random 2 range” and “Variation pattern type” are described as a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between “Random 2 range” and “Variation pattern type”. It is a column. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, a plurality of random 2 (1-251) values are included in each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, if the random 2 value extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “normal reach”.

  In the table of FIG. 6, “Random 3 range” and “Fluctuation pattern” are described as functions of a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between “Random 3 range” and “Variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “first super reach”. “4 Super Reach”.

  All values of random 3 (1-220) are assigned to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is selected, random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 to 220 of random values of 1 to 220. If it matches any numerical value of the determination value assigned to ˜70, it is determined that the variation pattern of “first super reach (15 seconds)” is set.

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is off, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the variation pattern. In the non-time-short state, when the variation display result is out of place, the normal state out-of-state determination table in FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is out of time in the time reduction state, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. 6B is selected. It should be noted that by using the determination tables of FIGS. 6A and 6B, the reach ratio at the time of deviation from the normal state and from the short-time state is constant regardless of the number of holds.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time is short or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variation display result is a probable big hit regardless of whether the time is short or not, the probable big hit determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the time short state deviation determination table in FIG. 6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that in the normal state deviation time determination table in FIG. 6B is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) compared to the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A. So that the percentage determined for normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations resulting in deviation display results instead of reaching reach)) is low, and the percentage determined for reach fluctuations with longer fluctuation times than normal fluctuations is low. Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-short state (normal state), the rate of change in the short-time state is higher in the time-short state, so the time-short state is the non-time-short state. The change display is performed with a change time shorter than that in the mean time. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-short state than in the non-time-short state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-short state.

  In the determination tables shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B that are selected when there is a deviation, the data is set so that the selection type of the reach type is selected in a height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D that are selected when a big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, the ratio of super reach reach production (the ratio of super reach reach production when a reach is selected) is higher when a big hit is made than when it is out of reach. The performance can increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the determination table shown in FIG. 6D that is selected when a promising big hit out of the big hits has a normal reach compared to the determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability is a big hit, the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach (the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than the case of the normal big win. By performing the reach of reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a promising big hit.

  Note that such a variation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storage (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that display variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is longer than when the total number of pending storage is less than the predetermined number It is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control for shortening. However, the expectation for reach can be maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of stored holds is 3 or more). In addition, only the super reach in the reach may not be shortened so as to execute the hold time reduction control. Furthermore, the short time control of the number of holdings may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be used.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used as shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Accordingly, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state start for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command that indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designation command after opening the big prize opening indicating the opening (closing) of the big prize opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting win has been received. Command A 402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been a second start winning.

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Command C0XX (H) is a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX (H) is a second reserved memory number designation command for designating the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory number designation command for indicating the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory number designation command for indicating the second reserved memory number are transmitted. The number of reserved memories can be specified, but not limited to this, each time a variable display is executed, a reserved memory number subtraction designation command for subtracting the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is transmitted. Thus, in the production control microcomputer 100, the number of reserved memories may be specified.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random value for variation pattern type determination among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see S1215 in FIG. 10), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit at the time of starting winning, the value of the big hit type, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Is within which range of determination values. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit and a value for designating the type of the big win are set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. A value for designating a range of a judgment value as a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or not and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data (holding storage data) such as random numbers corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The reserved storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number. (Random 2) and random number for variation pattern determination (Random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning at the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating a software random number, A process of saving (storing) in the saving area in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, on the basis of winning at the first start winning opening 13, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, based on the winning at the second start winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In some cases, “holding stored” indicates that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer. Note that the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in advance. It may be extracted at the time of the start of symbol variation.

  As described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer is read out at the time of starting winning and used for the pre-reading notice effect, and is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize slot 14, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a first (second) hold A command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process (for example, the winning effect process in S1215 and S1225), such as a memory number designation command, is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start prize designation command, and first (second) A storage area for storing data that can identify a received command is secured so that various commands such as a reserved storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach It is composed of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effects, etc., or various effect operations that are not accompanied by display changes of effect symbols. The notice effect control pattern includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, game state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (random number circuit 503 is initially set), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, the corresponding special symbol process 8 is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores reserved storage data (first reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. A first reserved storage buffer to be stored, and a second reserved storage buffer in which reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is stored Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the number of the first reserved memory data stored on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). 1 is incremented by 1 and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. (Random number for use) is extracted, and processing for storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is on, the second reserved memory data is counted on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1 and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed.

  With respect to the following description regarding the hold storage, the fact that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “hold stored”. In addition, numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer may be referred to as first reserved storage information, and numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as second reserved storage information.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), the variation pattern is determined (the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are determined), and the variation time is measured according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process that advances the process to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the fluctuation time corresponding to the decided fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is a process of performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), the control for transmitting the production control command for the round display production in the big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening are confirmed. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (S305). When all the rounds are finished, the process shifts to a big hit end process (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process of S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process in which a variation display result and a variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the starting winning (S1215).

  In this embodiment, after the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is generated and various data obtained at the start winning is stored as the stored storage information, the variable display is started. When the condition is satisfied, at the timing of starting the variable display, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for which the variable display is started is changed based on the reserved storage information in the special symbol normal process (S300). Whether or not the display result is the jackpot display result and the determination of the jackpot type are made based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set in correspondence with the various random numbers described above. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), the variation pattern (including the variation pattern type determination) is determined based on the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set in correspondence with the various random numbers described above. Based on.

  On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the start of variation display based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, specifically, the game ball is first started. At the timing of winning a winning at the winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (the timing at which the hold storage information is stored), the hold storage information storing various data obtained at the start winning is pre-read, and the pre-read hold Based on the stored information, the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set in correspondence with the various random numbers described above are determined in advance as to whether or not the jackpot is to be won, the jackpot type is determined, and the variation pattern is determined. In addition, a winning effect process is performed based on the variation pattern type determination value. By doing so, the effect control microcomputer 100 predicts the change display result before the change display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of starting winning, It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a pre-reading notice for notifying that a big hit (possibility of winning a big hit) during the variable display.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S1216), and transmits a variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1217). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and sets the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data to designate the first reserved memory number. Control to transmit the command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1219).

  By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) Each time the start winning prize is awarded to the start winning opening 13, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first start prize designation command A set of four commands, the first reserved memory number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process as described in S1215 (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (S1226), and control to transmit a variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S1227). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), and sets the value of the second reserved memory number counter to the EXT data to designate the second reserved memory number. Control to transmit the command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1229).

  By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) Every time a start winning prize is awarded to the start winning opening 14, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are always transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). When neither the first holding storage buffer nor the second holding storage buffer has holding storage data, processing (not shown) for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command for designating execution of the customer waiting demonstration display was performed. Then, this process is terminated.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is stored data in the second reserved memory buffer, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating “second” is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a depends on whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 8a performs the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. It is. On the other hand, when the data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 8b based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer. Is done.

  If there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer by the control of S52 to S54, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the second reserved memory data is It is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data in the first reserved memory.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Are stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3 and 4 in order.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S57). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”, Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S307 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer and executes a jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 extracts in S214 of the start port switch passing process and S224 of the start port switch pass process and stores it in the first reserved memory buffer and the second reserved memory buffer, and reads it into the random number buffer in the specific symbol normal process. The jackpot determination is performed on the stored jackpot determination random number. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 5) with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When it is in the gaming state or the short time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (S61), the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and then either the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times) or the condition that the next big hit is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing to stop display.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in S61), the process proceeds to S75 described later.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values in S61, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (S71). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 5C. One of the determination tables is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted by the start port passing process and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and read and stored in the random number buffer in the specific symbol normal process. Using the jackpot type determination table selected in S72, the jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value matching the random number (random 1) value for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer is determined (S73).

  As shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the big hit type and the big hit symbol is set so that the big hit type is different for each big hit type, Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control corresponding to the big hit type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as the jackpot type data. When the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the big hit type data.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a special symbol stop symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−”, which is a lost symbol, is set as a special symbol stop symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in S73 is set as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be “normal jackpot”, “3” is set as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined to be “probable big hit”, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process.

  In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91). The big hit flag is set when it is determined that the big hit is made, and the CPU 56 is in the big hit type information stored in S74, the non-short-time state or the short-time state. As a table used to determine the variation pattern type and the variation pattern according to the time-shortening information indicating, the normal state deviation time determination table shown in FIG. Any one of a loss judgment table, a normal big hit judgment table, and a probability variation big hit judgment table is selected.

  Here, the time reduction information is information indicating whether or not the time reduction state is present. The time reduction information is set at the end of the big hit gaming state, and is reset when the variable display resulting in the missed display result is executed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) in the time reduction state (next big hit Once a gaming state occurs, it is reset once.) The time reduction information indicates that the time reduction state is set when the time reduction flag is set, and the non-time reduction state is indicated when the time reduction flag is not set.

  When the big hit flag is set in S91, it is confirmed based on the big hit type data stored in S74 whether the big hit is a probable big hit (S92). When it is a probable big hit, the probable big hit determination table of FIG. 6D is selected (S93), and the process proceeds to S114. On the other hand, when it is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected (S94), and the process proceeds to S114.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S91, that is, when it is off, it is confirmed whether or not the hourly flag is set (S95). If the time reduction flag is not set, the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A is selected (S96), and the process proceeds to S114. On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. 6B is selected (S97), and the process proceeds to S114.

  Thereby, as a table used for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern according to the gaming state, based on the selection condition of the determination table as described above, the normal state deviation determination table shown in FIG. Any one of the judgment table at the time-short state deviation, the normal big hit judgment table, and the probability variation big hit judgment table is selected.

  Next, in S114, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer, and refers to the data of the variation pattern type determination table in the determination table selected in the processing of S93, S94, S96 or S97. Thus, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (S114).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 3 (variation pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer and relates to the variation pattern type determined in S114 in the variation pattern determination table section in the determination table selected in the processing of S93, S94, S96 or S97. By referring to the data, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (S115).

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S116). Then, the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command is transmitted as a command for designating the start of the variation of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is performed (S117).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S118). For example, by setting a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32, the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b performs the variable display as described above. Let it begin. When data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 8a starts the variable display of the first special symbol, and data indicating “second” in the special symbol pointer. Is set, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is started. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S119). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S120).

  In the display result designation command transmission process (S302) described above, the CPU 56 selects any one of the display result 1 designation command and the display result 3 designation command for designating the display result in accordance with the determined type of jackpot or loss. Control for transmitting the effect control command (see FIG. 7).

  In the special symbol changing process (S303) described above, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1, and when the variable time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update to the value and proceed to the special symbol stop process.

  As a result of the variable display, when the big win is achieved, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305), the big winning opening open processing (S306), and the big winning end processing (S307) are executed to control the big winning game state. Is done. In the big hit ending process (S307), the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set when the probability change big hit ends, and the time reduction flag is set when the normal big hit ends. As a result, after the end of the probable big hit, the state is controlled to the probable change state and the short time state.

  It is necessary to continue the time-short state after the probable big hit and the normal big hit until one of the conditions of the change display is executed 100 times and the next big hit occurs. In such a duration of 100 times of variable display, in the jackpot ending process (S307), a time-count counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time-short state is set to 100 times, and thereafter the variable display is executed. The special time stop process is performed by subtracting and updating. Based on the fact that the time reduction counter has counted up, the time reduction flag is reset to control to end the time reduction state.

  Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify a received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes corresponding to the control state is performed. A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, random numbers (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol used by the microcomputer 100 for effect control) Then, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the variable display is executed (S706) Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR7 is counted by a random counter that updates the count value by software. It is generated, is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, and is extracted as a random number by being extracted at a timing determined for each.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S707). In the hold storage display control process in S707, display control of active display (active display) displayed in the active display area is also executed. Specifically, display control is performed in the following processing. For example, in the process of S704, a predetermined first update flag is set when a variable display is received, and a predetermined second update flag is set when a variable display is received. If the first update flag is set, in the process of S707, one first hold display in the hold display area is deleted, and the remaining first hold display is directed toward the active display area one by one. While shifting and updating the display of the hold display area, if the variable display second update flag is set, one second hold display in the hold display area is deleted in the process of S707, and the remaining second hold The display is shifted one by one toward the direction of the active display area to update the display of the hold display area, and after the variable display, the process proceeds to S702.

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 transmits the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the production devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-read effect process (S700) for determining whether to perform the pre-read effect and selecting the type of the pre-read effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on, any one of S800 to S807 is performed.

  In the effect control process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbols, but the control related to the change display of the effect symbols synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S700) is a process of performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. The pre-reading effect is a special symbol change based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold information (holding storage information) comes. This is a production technique such as determining the contents of the display and giving a notice in advance of how the future special symbols will change. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, before the fluctuating display by the hold information is executed, a big hit occurs later based on the display mode of the hold display or the display mode of the active display corresponding to the hold information. A kind of effect (see FIG. 17 or the like) for notifying that there is a possibility is performed as a pre-reading effect. Hereinafter, the hold information (hold storage information) that is the target of the prefetch effect is referred to as “target hold information (hold storage information)”. Further, the fluctuation display based on the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target fluctuation display”. Further, the hold display based on the hold information targeted for the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target hold display”, and the active display based on the hold information targeted for the pre-read effect is referred to as “target active display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) to be started. The effect symbol variation process (S802) is a process for performing processing for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derive and display the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The jackpot display process (S804) is a process for performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the jackpot after the end of the variation time. The round process (S805) is a process for performing display control during a round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to post-round processing, and if the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing. The post-round processing (S806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing. The jackpot end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended in the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the table, an effect device (effect parts) such as the effect display device 9 is controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, information related to the variable display of the hold storage information that is displayed on hold is pre-read before the change display based on the hold storage information is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pre-read result is displayed. Based on the pre-read hold storage information, the production control for executing the pre-reading production as the specific production at a predetermined timing is executed by the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 15 is a prefetch effect type table showing the relationship between the type of prefetch effect, the contents of the prefetch effect, and the start time of the prefetch effect. The prefetch effect type table is stored in the ROM 102. As shown in FIG. 15, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of pre-reading effects including a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, a hold change notice effect, and a zone notice effect.

  The chance eye notice effect is a look-ahead effect that displays a display result of a specific symbol combination (for example, a predetermined odd number symbol combination) called “chance” in a plurality of fluctuating displays before the target fluctuating display. In this embodiment, as the chance eye notice effect, any one of a plurality of types of chance eye notice effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is different is used. Note that only one chance eye notice effect pattern that is fixedly set may be used as the chance eye notice effect.

  A plurality of types of chance eye notice effect patterns that are set so that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is different, for example, the first chance notice effect pattern in which the display color of the effect symbol when the chance eyes are stopped and displayed is blue And a second chance eye notice effect pattern in which the display color is green and a third chance eye notice effect pattern in which the display color is red. These multiple types of chance eye notice effect patterns are selected according to display results so that the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is the magnitude relationship of, for example, “blue <green <red” with respect to the display color of the effect symbol at the chance eye stop display A percentage is set.

  Selection of such a chance eye notice effect pattern is performed using a chance eye notice effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the chance eye notice effect mode selection table, each chance eye notice is set so that the random number SR6 for selecting the chance eye notice effect style updated by the random number update process (S706) described above can realize the selection ratio as described above. It is associated with the production pattern. In the chance eye notice effect mode selection table, a chance eye notice effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  In this embodiment, a chance combination uses a combination of symbols having a wide range of variations such as an odd symbol combination. For example, a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right symbols are “1, 2, 3”. You may use the combination of a pattern with a narrow variation | variation width | variety that only is a chance eye.

  The background change notice effect is displayed by changing a predetermined background image (such as the background image that makes up the background of the effect symbol) to a special background image in multiple variations before the target variation display. This is a look-ahead effect. In this embodiment, for the background change notice effect, any one of a plurality of types of background change notice effect patterns set so as to differ in the degree of expectation to be a big hit is used. Note that only one type of background change notice effect that is fixedly set may be used as the background change notice effect.

  The plurality of types of background change notice effect patterns that are set so that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is different, for example, the first background change notice effect pattern in which the special background image is the first special background image and the special background image are the first. 2 is composed of a second background change notice effect pattern that becomes a special background image and a third background change notice effect pattern that makes the special background image a third special background image. These multiple types of background change notice effect patterns are such that the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the special background image has a magnitude relationship of, for example, “first special background image <second special background image <third special background image”. A selection ratio is set for each display result.

  Such selection of the background change notice effect pattern is performed using the background change notice effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the background change notice effect mode selection table, the background change notice effect mode selection random number SR7 updated by the random number update process (S706) described above allows each background change notice so that the selection ratio as described above can be realized. It is associated with the production pattern. In the background change notice effect mode selection table, a background change notice effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number SR7 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  The hold change notice effect is a pre-read effect that changes the display mode of the hold image displayed in the hold display area a predetermined number of times (one or more times) before the target change display. In the following description, the change display in which the prefetch effect is executed may be referred to as prefetch effect execution change.

  In the hold change effect, for example, the following change in the display mode of the hold image is possible. An image that appears and is displayed in the normal color (yellow) can be changed to a white, blue, green, or red image. An image appearing and displayed in white can be changed into a blue, green, or red image. The image appearing and displayed in blue can be changed to a green or red image. An image appearing and displayed in green can be changed to a red image. Thus, in the hold change effect, the change effect of the display mode can be executed in the change mode in which the degree of expectation that is a big hit is high. Note that, in the hold change effect, the change effect of the display mode may be executed in a change mode in which the degree of expectation that is a big hit is low.

  In this embodiment, the hold change notice effect is selected and used from among a plurality of types of hold change notice effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is different.

  As a plurality of types of hold change notice effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is different, for example, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is “normal color (yellow)” regarding the display color of the hold image that is finally displayed. A plurality of types of on-hold change effect patterns are set so as to have a size relationship of <white <blue <green <red. Furthermore, among the plural types of hold change effect patterns, an effect pattern in which the hold change is executed only once and an effect pattern in which the hold change is executed a plurality of times are included.

  These multiple types of hold change notice effect patterns are selected according to the display result so that the display color of the hold image to be finally displayed has a relationship of “normal color (yellow) <white <blue <green <red”. Is set.

  The selection of such a hold change notice effect pattern is performed using a hold change notice effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the hold change notice effect mode selection table, the hold change notice effect mode selection random number R8 updated by the random number update process (S706) described above allows each hold change notice so that the selection ratio as described above can be realized. It is associated with the production pattern. In the hold change notice effect mode selection table, a hold change notice effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number R8 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  The zone notice effect is a prefetch effect that displays a shutter image and then displays a special background image combined with a predetermined background image that is normally used. The zone notice effect is started when the game ball is won at the first start opening or during the variable display. The shutter image is an image that is displayed in a plurality of variation display or target variation display before target variation display. In the shutter image, an image imitating the shutter and an image in which characters such as a zone-dedicated or non-zone-dedicated character are displayed in various expressions before the shutter are displayed. The special background image is an image displayed in a strip shape at the top and bottom of the screen, and is an image in which the characters “CHANCE ZONE” are continuously displayed.

  When the shutter image is displayed in a plurality of variable displays before the target variable display, the special background image is displayed instead of the shutter image display when the target variable display is started. When the shutter image is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the target storage information of the target, the shutter image is displayed for a short time, for example 1 second, when the reach is established or when the super reach is developed, and then the special background image is displayed.

  In this embodiment, in the zone notice effect, an effect pattern of a pattern in which the movable effect member 60 is activated and a pattern that is not activated when the special background image is displayed is used as the zone notice effect pattern. In this embodiment, the operation pattern of the movable effect member 60 is one pattern, but the operation pattern of the movable effect member 60 may be a plurality of patterns. In addition, as the zone notice effect, only the pattern in which the movable effect member 60 having the pattern in which the movable effect member 60 operates and the pattern in which the movable effect member 60 does not operate may be used, or only the pattern that does not operate may be used. May be.

  The expectation level that is a big hit is set to be different between when the effect pattern in which the movable effect member 60 operates is executed and when it is not executed. The selection ratio is such that the expectation level that is a big hit when an effect pattern in which the movable effect member 60 is activated is higher than the expected degree that is a big hit when an effect pattern in which the movable effect member 60 is not activated is executed. Is set.

  Such a zone notice effect pattern selection is performed using a zone notice effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the zone advance notice effect selection table, each zone advance notice effect pattern is set so that the random number SR6 for selecting the zone advance notice effect mode updated by the random number update process (S706) described above can realize the selection ratio as described above. It is associated. In the zone notice effect mode selection table, a zone notice effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  These multiple types of pre-reading effects may correspond to a case where only one of the effects is executed or a plurality of kinds of effects are executed in parallel, corresponding to one variation display. Note that, as the pre-reading effect, in addition to the effects described above, other types of notice effects such as a dialog (dialog) notice effect and an active display change effect may be executable.

  A serif notice effect is, for example, a scene in which a character image such as a human image that can be displayed separately from the effect design and the background image says a special serif that is different from the usual speech in a predetermined number of variable displays. This is a look-ahead effect that produces an effect to be displayed. The active display change effect is a display in a special display mode different from the display mode in which the display mode of the active image displayed in the active display area is normally displayed in the variable display multiple times before the target variable display. This is a look-ahead production.

  FIG. 16 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 for explaining the prefetch effect. Here, among the prefetch effects, a prefetch effect that displays a notification image, specifically, a chance eye notice effect, a background notice effect, and a hold change notice effect will be described. Among the pre-read effects, the zone notice effect has a different display mode, and will be described following the description using FIGS. 16 and 17. In addition, when executing the zone notice effect, a notification image may be displayed in the same manner as these prefetch effects.

  In FIG. 16, as basic display images on the effect display device 9, left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93, a hold image H in the hold display area 18 c, and an active display area AHA An active image AH is shown. In FIG. 16, in the left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93, the state during variation display is indicated by a downward arrow, and the state during variation stop is indicated by a numerical symbol.

  FIG. 16A shows a display state when the pre-reading effect is not executed. FIG. 16B1 shows a display state when the chance eye notice effect is being executed as the prefetch effect. FIG. 16B2 shows the display state when the background change notice effect is being executed as the prefetch effect. FIG. 16 (B3) shows a display state when the hold change notice effect is being executed as the prefetch effect.

  When the chance eye notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16 (B1), a predetermined chance eye is configured at the time of the derivation display of the change display result at the end of each of the plurality of change displays for which the effect is executed. An effect of stopping and displaying the combination of effect symbols to be performed is performed.

  When the background change notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16B2, the background symbol is changed from the normal background symbol to the special background symbol at the start of the first variable display of the plurality of variable indications where the effect is executed. After that, the effect of continuously displaying the special background symbol in a plurality of variation displays is performed.

  When the hold change notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16 (B3), the change is displayed during the change display of the change display one or more times when the effect is executed (when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the effect display). After the image H is temporarily deformed into a star shape and displayed by light emission, the display mode (display color) of the reserved image H is changed. The hold image for hold display can be displayed in different display modes depending on the degree of expectation that the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result, that is, the ease of display when the jackpot display result is obtained. For example, the reserved image is displayed in a predetermined shape such as a circle, and can be displayed in different image colors depending on the degree of expectation that the variable display result is the jackpot display result.

  The reserved image can be expected to be a big hit in a mode (color mode) where the degree of expectation varies depending on the type of image color due to the magnitude relationship between the normal color (yellow) <white <blue <green <red It is. Based on the occurrence of the new reserved storage information, when the display of the reserved image corresponding to the new reserved storage information appears on the effect display device 9, the new reserved image is displayed in the normal color (yellow), white, It is displayed in a display mode such as blue, green, or red. When the hold image is changed to a display mode having a high expectation degree of jackpot due to the hold change notice effect, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, the on-hold change notice effect is an effect on which the color of the on-hold image changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an on-change effect on the shape of the on-hold image is executed. May be. As the hold change notice effect, an effect in which the size of the hold image changes may be executed. As the hold change notice effect, an effect in which the type of the hold image changes may be executed. As the hold change notice effect, an effect in which the image added to the hold image changes may be executed. Further, an effect may be executed by combining any one of color change, shape change, size change, type change, and additional image change. As described above, as the hold change notice effect, any effect may be executed as long as the display mode changes.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (B1) to (B3), any one of a plurality of types of prefetching effects such as a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a hold change notice effect is executed. , By displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 displaying the characters “pre-reading” in the telop display mode as a common notification image, it is notified that the pre-reading performance is being performed in the common mode regardless of the type of the pre-reading effect. A pre-reading notification (predetermined notification) effect is executed. Thus, in response to the execution of the pre-reading effect as the specific effect, the player can determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is being performed by executing the pre-reading notification in the common mode regardless of the type of the pre-reading effect. It becomes easy to recognize, and the recognizability about a plurality of types of prefetch effects can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, for each of a plurality of types of prefetching effects such as a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a hold change notice effect, a plurality of kinds of effect modes (effect patterns) are provided. The pre-reading effect can be executed in the effect mode selected from among the above-mentioned effect modes, but when each of the pre-reading effects such as the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect is executed Regardless of which effect mode is executed, effect control is performed in which the pre-reading notification image 94 that displays the above-described characters “pre-reading” in the telop display mode is displayed as a common notification image. As a result, for each type of pre-reading effect, a pre-reading notification effect for notifying that the pre-reading effect is being performed in a common mode is executed regardless of the type of the effect mode. Thereby, it becomes easy for a player to recognize whether or not the pre-reading effect is being performed, and the recognizability for the pre-reading effects of a plurality of types of effect modes can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, a pre-read notification image that displays the characters “pre-reading” in a telop display mode in a plurality of types of pre-read effects such as a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a hold change notice effect. When the effect control for displaying 94 as a common notification image is performed and each prefetch effect of the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect is executed, a plurality of types in each prefetch effect As for the effect mode of the game, whether or not the pre-reading effect is being performed is performed by performing the effect control that displays the pre-reading notification image 94 displaying the characters “pre-reading” in the telop display mode as a common notification image. It becomes easier for a person to recognize, and the recognizability for a plurality of types of pre-reading effects can be further improved.

  As the pre-reading notification, the following notification may be executed in addition to the pre-reading notification image 94 or instead of the pre-reading notification image 94. First, a notification of outputting a sound such as “pre-reading” from the speaker 27 may be given. Further, as the pre-reading notification, a notification such as “pre-reading” may be output from the speaker 27 without displaying the pre-reading notification image 94. As an example of performing the pre-reading notification by voice, the notification may be performed by outputting a special sound that is not output in a normal gaming state. In addition, as pre-reading notification, notification may be performed by operating a movable body such as a predetermined accessory. In addition, as the pre-reading notification, the pre-reading notification image 94 on the effect display device 9 may not be displayed, and a display capable of specifying “pre-reading” on another display device may be displayed. In this case, the other display devices include a sub display device (such as a small image display device) that is smaller than the effect display device 9 and various display devices such as a dot matrix display device. In addition, the indication that can be specified as “pre-reading” is a character that can be specified as pre-reading, a predetermined figure that can be specified as pre-reading, and a specification that is pre-reading Any display may be used as long as it is a display that can directly or indirectly specify that prefetching is possible, such as a predetermined number. Further, the pre-reading notification may be executed in an effect mode in which any of the various notification modes described above is combined.

  In a conventional pachinko machine, when a pre-reading effect as a specific effect is executed when a variable display of the effect symbol is executed, various effects such as a reach effect executed for the variable display, and a pre-reading Differences in performance from production may be ambiguous, and for first-time players, it is difficult to determine whether or not pre-reading production is being executed, and the level of understanding of the production is insufficient. Therefore, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest of the game cannot be improved. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, since a common mode pre-reading notification is made corresponding to a plurality of types of pre-reading effects, it is clear that the pre-reading effects are being executed. Can be notified. As a result, by executing the pre-reading notification in the common mode, even the first-time player described above can easily determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed, and the understanding level of the effect is insufficient. Can improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 17 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing the pre-reading notification end effect for ending the pre-reading notification when the pre-reading notification is executed. In FIG. 17, the display state of the effect display device 9 is shown as time passes. In FIG. 17, the pre-reading notification end effect for the pre-reading notification when the hold change notice effect is executed is shown as a representative example. However, the pre-reading notification end effect shown in FIG. Are executed in the same way.

  In the variable display for a plurality of times during the effect period in which the hold change notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 17A, a pre-reading notification is displayed by displaying a pre-reading notification image 94. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, the pre-read determination target variation display times are based on the display of the pre-read notification image 94 in the same manner as the immediately preceding variation display times shown in FIG. The pre-reading notification is executed from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, the pre-reading notification by displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 is continuously executed even after the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17D, the pre-reading notification by displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 is continued even when the variable display time of the variable display cycle immediately after (next time) the variable display cycle of the prefetch determination target is started. As shown in FIG. 17D, when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the display of the pre-reading notification image 94 is ended, whereby the pre-reading notification is ended.

  FIG. 18 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 when the zone notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 18A, the zone notice effect is a shutter closing zone notice effect in which the shutter image 300S is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18B, the special background image 300T has a strip shape at the top and bottom of the screen. And a zone notice effect after opening the shutter displayed on the screen. In the shutter closing zone notice effect shown in FIG. 18A, the first special character 300C1, the second special character 300C2, the third special character, etc. (see FIG. 33D) pose in front of the shutter image 300S. Images that are switched and displayed while changing clothes and clothes are displayed. In the zone advance notice effect after opening the shutter shown in FIG. 18B, an image corresponding to the effect similar to the normal reach effect (including the normal reach effect and the super reach effect) is displayed together with the special background image 300T. 18A shows the decorative pattern 5C in the middle, and FIG. 18B shows the decorative pattern 5L on the left, the decorative pattern 5C in the middle, and the decorative pattern 5R on the right. Yes.

  FIG. 19 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the effect display device 9. FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table for assigning Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 19B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the Z value setting by the Z value setting table. In this embodiment, the plurality of layers include a small symbol display layer, a zone effect display layer, a change effect display layer, and an effect symbol display layer. In the small symbol display layer, an effect image showing a small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area is drawn. The small symbol display area is a display region in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the small symbol variation display, which is a production symbol that is reduced from the normal representation symbol, is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. is there. In the zone effect display layer, a hold image used in the hold display change effect and a shutter image when the zone notice effect is executed and a notice effect image shown as a dedicated character image dedicated to the zone notice effect are displayed. When the shutter image is completely displayed on the zone effect display layer, the shutter image is displayed in the entire display area (or most area) in the zone effect display layer. In the change effect display layer, an effect image indicating a character or the like used in the active display change effect is drawn. In the effect symbol display layer, an effect image showing the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas is drawn. In the image data of the effect image drawn on each display layer, a Z value that is a depth value used when drawing each effect image in a superimposed manner is set. The Z value of the effect image drawn in each of the small symbol display layer, the change effect display layer, and the effect symbol display layer by setting the Z value by the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. The value varies depending on the display layer on which is drawn.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, as a configuration used for image processing, a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) and a VRAM (Video RAM) are provided in addition to the VDP (Video Display Processor) described above. In the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, when the VDP writes the image data read from the CGROM into the frame buffer or the like of the VRAM, the priority may be determined by performing a Z value comparison operation. The image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a small value as the Z value has a higher priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer assigned with a large value as the Z value. Can be placed on the side.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the small symbol display layer on which the effect image indicating the small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area (the area where the downward arrow is shown) is most viewed from the player. The Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side. Therefore, even when a display effect is displayed by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the effect display device 9, the player can always visually recognize the display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V. The zone effect display layer is on the rear side of the small symbol display layer, but the Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side of the other layers. For this reason, when the zone notice effect is executed, the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V are displayed, but the characters used in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect displayed in the change effect display layer, etc. The effect image showing the effect symbol, the effect image showing the effect symbol that is variably displayed in the effect symbol display area of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect symbol display layer is difficult for the player to visually recognize by the shutter image. Or it becomes impossible.

  The change effect display layer is a display layer that provides an effect region in which an effect image used in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect is displayed, and is behind the small symbol display layer. The Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side. Thereby, the effect image used by the hold display change effect and the active display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position in front of the effect image showing the effect symbol. In this way, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the effect symbol serving as the identification information image.

  Note that the Z value may be set such that the zone effect display layer is arranged on the front side of the player from the small symbol display layer. In this case, when the zone notice effect is executed, the effect image displayed on the display layers other than the zone effect display layer, including the effect image indicating the small symbol displayed on the small symbol display layer, is displayed by the shutter image. It becomes difficult or impossible for a person to see.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing various determination tables for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch effect. 20A to 20C show a chance eye notice effect presence / absence determination table used for determining whether or not to execute a chance eye notice effect. 20D to 20F show a background change notice effect presence / absence determination table used to determine whether or not to execute a background change notice effect. 20 (G) to (I) show a hold change notice effect presence / absence determination table used for determining whether or not to execute a hold change notice effect. FIGS. 20J to 20L show a zone notice effect presence / absence determination table used for determining whether or not to execute a zone notice effect.

  In the chance eye notice effect presence / absence determination table, (A) the chance hit notice effect presence / absence determination table of (B), the chance reach notice effect presence / absence determination table of (B) super-reach, and other than (C) super reach A time chance eye notice effect presence / absence determination table is included. The background change announcement effect presence / absence determination table includes (D) a big hit background change announcement presence / absence determination table, (E) super-reach out-of-background change notice effect determination / existence determination table, and (F) other than super-reach. A background change notice effect presence / absence determination table is included. In the hold change notice effect presence / absence determination table, (G) big hit hold change notice presence / absence decision table, (H) super reach detachment hold change notice notice presence / absence determination table, and (I) other than super reach. A hold change notice effect presence / absence determination table is included. The zone announcement effect presence / absence determination table of (J) is a jackpot time zone announcement presence / absence determination table, (K) super-reach outage zone notification effect presence / absence determination table, and (L) non-super reach other than zone reach notification effect. A presence / absence determination table. Each of the notice effect presence / absence determination tables is stored in the ROM 102.

  (A) jackpot chance notice announcement presence / absence determination table, (D) jackpot background change notice effect presence / absence judgment table, (G) jackpot hold change notice effect presence / absence judgment table, and (J) jackpot zone The notice presence / absence determination table is used at the time of jackpot prediction in which the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display based on the hold storage information corresponding to the hold display is predicted to be the jackpot display result.

  (B) Super-reach out chance chance notice effect determination table, (E) Super reach out-background change notice effect presence determination table, (H) Super reach out-hold change notice notice presence determination table, and ( The super-reach lag zone advance notice presence / absence determination table of K) is used for predicting a super-reach lag that is predicted that the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display based on the hold storage information corresponding to the hold display becomes the jackpot display result.

  (C) Except for super reach, chances for announcement of presence / absence of announcement effect, table for determination of presence / absence of change for background change except for super reach of (F), table for determining presence / absence of announcement for presence of change on hold except for super reach in (I) In addition, the non-super-reach zone prediction effect presence / absence determination table other than the super-reach of (L) indicates that the non-super-reach other than the super-reach predicted that the variable display result of the variable display based on the stored storage information corresponding to the hold display becomes the jackpot display result. Used.

  In each chance eye notice effect presence / absence determination table of (A) to (C), a total of 100 numbers of random numbers SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 99) for determining the presence or absence of chance eye notice effect execute the notice effect. It is assigned to the decision and the decision not to execute the notice effect. In each of the background change notice effect presence / absence determination tables (D) to (F), a total of 200 numerical values of the random number SR3 (value range of 0 to 199) for determining whether or not the background change notice effect is executed execute the notice effect. It is assigned to the decision and the decision not to execute the notice effect. In each of the on-hold change notice effect presence / absence determination tables (G) to (I), a total of 300 numerical values of the random number SR4 (numerical range of 0 to 299) for determining whether or not to hold on / off notice effect execution execute the notice effect. It is assigned to the decision and the decision not to execute the notice effect. In each zone notice effect presence / absence determination table of (J) to (L), a total of 500 numerical values of the random number SR11 (numerical range of 0 to 499) for determining whether or not to execute the zone notice effect is determined to execute the notice effect. The decision to not execute the notice effect is assigned. For each of SR2 to SR4 and SR11, the number of allocated random numbers is shown for clarity of explanation.

  In each of (A) big hit chance notice announcement presence determination table, (D) big hit background change notice effect presence determination table, and (G) big hit hold change notice effect presence decision table, predetermined timings are used. The data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “execute the notice effect> do not execute the notice effect” according to the value of SR2 extracted in (1). (B) Super-reach off chance eye advance notice presence / absence determination table, (E) Super reach off-background change notice effect presence / absence determination table, and (H) Super reach off-hold change notice notice presence / absence determination table. In each case, the data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “execute the notice effect = do not execute the notice effect” according to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. (C) Except for super reach, chances for announcement of presence / absence of notice announcement effect, table for presence / absence of change notice of background change except for super reach of (F), and presence / absence of notice of change for hold notice when deviation occurs except for super reach in (I) In each of the determination tables, data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “execute a notice effect <do not execute a notice effect” according to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when (A) to (C), (D) to (F), (G) to (I), and (J) to (L) are compared, the ratio of executing the pre-reading effect at the time of determining the big hit is “ The data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of chance chance notice effect <background change notice effect <holding change notice effect <zone notice effect>. In addition, the data is set so that the ratio of executing the pre-reading effect at the time of losing has a magnitude relationship of “chance eye notice effect> background change notice effect> holding change notice effect> zone notice effect”. Accordingly, the degree of expectation for the big hit when the effect is executed increases due to the size relationship of “chance eye notice effect <background change notice effect <holding change notice effect <zone notice effect”. Note that other magnitude relations may be set, such as the degree of expectation for the big hit when the pre-reading effect is executed is the same for each of the notice effects.

  20 (A) to 20 (L), when the variable display result of the variable display based on the stored storage information becomes a jackpot display result, it is more likely than the case where the display result is an outlier display result. For each of the notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect, the ratio to be determined increases. Thereby, when such a prefetch effect is performed, the expectation degree with respect to the big hit of a player can be raised compared with the case where it is not performed. 20A to 20L, the variable display result of the variable display based on the stored storage information becomes an outlier display result. However, in the super reach with a high expectation level that is a big hit, the misalignment display result The chance of winning a big hit is lower than when super-reach is reached, and a non-super-reaching variation display (for example, normal reach variation display, normal variation display, etc.) is more likely to be a misaligned display result. For each of the notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect, the ratio to be determined increases. Thereby, when such a prefetch effect is performed, the expectation degree with respect to the big hit of a player can be raised compared with the case where it is not performed.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of a prefetch effect execution start change selection table. The pre-reading effect (other than the zone notice effect) execution start variation selection table shown in FIG. 21A executes a prefetch effect other than the zone notice effect such as the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect. When it is determined to be performed, it is used for selecting and determining a variable display for starting execution of the pre-reading effect. FIG. 21B is used to select and determine the timing for starting execution of the zone notice effect when it is decided to execute the zone notice effect as the pre-read effect. The prefetch effect execution start variation selection table is stored in the ROM 102.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, the pre-reading effects other than the zone notice effect are executed on the condition that at least two pieces of reserved memory information including newly generated reserved memory information exist, Since the upper limit number of the first reserved memory number is 4, the variable display for starting execution of the pre-reading effect is based on the variable display based on the pre-stored determination target hold memory information at the time of the previous variable display, It can be executed from any one of the time when the change is displayed two times before and the time when the change is displayed three times before.

  In the pre-reading effect execution start variation selection table other than the zone notice effect shown in FIG. 21 (A), the number 2 is the number of reserved memories (first number of reserved memories) of the first special symbol including the newly generated reserved memory information. A total of 400 numbers of random numbers SR5 (number range of 0 to 399) for pre-reading effect execution start variation selection are assigned to each of the four at the time of variation display one to three times before.

  In the pre-reading effect execution start variation selection table other than the zone notice effect shown in FIG. 21 (A), the larger the first reserved memory number, the easier it is to start the pre-reading effect from the earlier variation display time. Data is set. When it is decided to execute a pre-reading effect such as a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a hold change notice effect, a change that starts execution of the prefetch effect using the prefetch effect execution start variation selection table The display is selected and determined. Thereby, the execution start timing of the pre-reading effect is not fixed, so that it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect.

  In the pre-reading effect (zone notice effect) execution start variation selection table (zone notice effect execution start variation selection table) shown in FIG. 21 (B), at the time of winning, the change (reach establishment), and the change (super reach development). Sometimes, a total of 400 numbers of random numbers SR5 (number range of 0 to 399) for selecting pre-reading effect execution start variation are allocated. In the following, the zone notice effect that starts when winning a prize is the first zone notice effect, the zone notice effect that starts when the change (reach is established), the second zone notice effect, and the zone notice effect that starts when the change (super reach development) Sometimes called a three-zone notice effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the prefetch effect is executed only in the low base state, the prefetch effect is executed with the first reserved memory as a target. Note that the prefetch effect may be executed even in the high base state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20, about the prefetch effect, it is determined independently whether each prefetch effect is performed. On the other hand, after randomly determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect, when it is determined to execute the prefetching effect, the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, the hold change notice effect, and Any one of the zone notice effects or any one of a plurality of kinds of notice effects may be selected, and the selected effect may be executed as a prefetch effect. In addition, regarding the pre-reading effect, the zone notice effect and the pre-read effect other than the zone notice effect may be separately distinguished, and it may be independently determined whether or not to perform the pre-read effect other than the zone notice effect and the zone notice effect. . Here, when it is determined to execute a pre-reading effect other than the zone notice effect, one of the chance notice notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect, or any one of the notice effect A plurality of types of notice effects may be selected, and the selected effects may be executed as prefetch effects.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning reception command buffer + effect buffer, and FIG. 24 is an explanation showing start winning reception command buffer data designation contents. FIG. The RAM 103 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 22, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 22 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, or the like. Types of flags are provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of a flag and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as SR1-1 to SR5 and SR11 described above. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer as shown in FIG. 23 are stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As shown in FIG. 23, two types of start command reception command buffer and effect buffer are provided for the first special symbol and for the second special symbol. FIG. 23 shows, as an example, a start winning reception command buffer and an effect buffer corresponding to the first special symbol for executing the prefetch effect. The starting command reception command buffer for the first special symbol corresponds to the columns of symbol designation, variation type, starting prize designation, and reserved memory number designation in the buffer shown in FIG. This is a storage buffer for receiving a received command when it occurs. In the start winning reception command buffer, a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the first reserved storage number is provided. In such a start winning reception command buffer, whether or not the pre-reading effect (other than the zone notice effect) is determined, execution change designation, chance eye notice effect mode designation, background change shown in FIG. A buffer for production including a storage area corresponding to the fields of advance notice effect mode designation, hold change notice effect mode designation, presence / absence of zone notice effect determination, zone notice effect execution change designation, and zone notice effect execution mode designation is stored in each hold memory. It is added in an associated manner. Note that the start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer may be provided separately in different areas in the RAM 103.

  Regarding the received command buffer at the time of the start winning prize, the area for storing the design designation command (“design designation” in the figure) and the area for storing the variation type command (in the figure “variation type” in the figure) ”), An area for storing a start winning designation command (first starting prize designation command) (“ start winning prize designation ”in the figure), and an area for storing a reserved storage number designation command (first reserved storage number designation command) ( In the figure, “pending storage number designation”) is provided.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize slot 14, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a start prize designation command (first or second start prize designation command), and a reserved memory A command called a number designation command (first or second reserved memory number designation command) is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 stores the data specifying the commands in the order received at the time of the start winning, from the head in the empty area of the start winning received command buffer. As a result, when there is a start winning, the received command is stored in the respective areas of “design designation”, “variation type”, “start winning designation” and “holding memory count designation” in the figure. .

  Various data stored in the start winning reception command buffer and the corresponding effect buffer shown in FIG. 23 correspond to the first storage area (buffer number “1”) every time the effect symbol variation display is started. Stored in the area) is read out for use in producing a variable display, and then deleted, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 23, when the variation display of the effect symbol is started next, each data stored in the buffer number “1” is read and then deleted and corresponds to the buffer number “2”. Each data stored in the area is shifted to an area corresponding to the buffer number “1”.

  The effect buffer shown in FIG. 23 may be provided with a storage area in an address correspondence relationship that is connected (subordinate) to the start winning reception command buffer, and an address storage area independent of the start winning reception command buffer. In addition, a storage area may be provided corresponding to each start winning memory.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the “design designation” command area, “C200 (H)” indicates a missed display result designation, and “C201 (H)” represents a jackpot display result designation. In the “variation type” command area, “C300 (H)” indicates the type of normal variation, “C301 (H)” indicates the type of normal reach variation, and “C302 (H)” indicates the type of super reach variation. Show. In the “start winning prize designation” command area, “A 401 (H)” indicates the first starting prize designation, and “A 402 (H)” indicates the second start prize designation. In the “reserved memory number designation” area, “C001 (H)” to “C004 (H)” indicate the first reserved memory numbers “0” to “4”, and “C101 (H)” to “C104 ( H) ”indicates the second reserved storage numbers“ 0 ”to“ 4 ”.

  The empty area of the reception command buffer at the time of start winning, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is “0000 (H)”. At the time of starting winning, command transmission is performed in the order of a symbol specifying command, a variation type command, a starting winning specifying command (first and second), and a reserved storage number specifying command (first and second). Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the start prize designation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Commands and pending storage number designation commands are stored. FIG. 20B shows an example in which commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”.

  In the effect control buffer setting unit 194, the following information for effects is stored corresponding to the data of the buffer numbers “1” to “4” in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning for the first special symbol. An effect buffer is provided as a storage area. For the second special symbol, in this embodiment, since the pre-reading effect is not executed, no effect buffer for executing the pre-reading effect is provided. For the second special symbol, an effect buffer for executing the prefetch effect may be provided, and the prefetch effect may be executed in the same manner as the first special symbol.

  With respect to the first special symbol, a “pre-reading effect (zone advance notice) is performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on predetermined data such as the symbol designating information stored in the reception command buffer at the time of the start winning prize in a pre-read effect process described later. Data other than production) determination presence / absence, data of “pre-reading production (non-zone announcement production) execution variation designation”, “chance eye announcement production mode designation” data, “background change announcement production mode designation” data, “pending change” The buffer number “1” corresponding to the hold storage information in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning is the data of “notification effect designation”, the data “presence / absence determination of zone announcement effect”, and the data of “designation change execution of zone announcement effect” Corresponding to each data of “4”, “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) provided in the effect buffer” Data storage area for “presence / absence”, data storage area for “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) execution variation designation”, data storage area for “chance eye notice effect mode designation”, and data storage for “background change notice effect style designation” Are stored in the area, the data storage area of “pending change notice effect mode designation”, and the data storage area of “zone notice effect determination presence / absence”.

  The data of “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) determination presence / absence” is data indicating whether or not a pre-read effect other than the zone notice effect has been determined (presence / absence). The “pre-reading effect (other than the zone notice effect) execution variation designation” data is data indicating whether or not it is designated (determined) as a change display when executing a prefetch effect other than the zone notice effect. The “chance eye notice effect mode designation” data is data indicating whether or not the chance eye notice effect is executed and the effect aspect. The “background change notice effect designation” data is data indicating whether or not the background change notice effect is executed and the effect form. “Holding change notice effect designating” data is data indicating the presence / absence of the hold change notice effect and the effect form.

  For the pre-reading determination target as the on-hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning prize, when the execution determination of the pre-reading effect based on the various notice effect presence / absence determination tables of FIGS. When data of “1000 (H)” that can specify “no judgment” is stored in the data storage area of “presence / absence of determination other than zone notice effect”, and it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, In the storage area for “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) determination presence / absence”, data “1001 (H)” that can specify “determined” is stored.

  When it is determined to execute at least one of the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect for the pre-reading determination target as the hold memory information corresponding to the new start winning prize In accordance with the contents of the effect, “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) execution change designation” is stored in the data storage area of “prefetch effect (other than zone notice effect) execution change designation” corresponding to the hold storage information before the prefetch determination target. "2001 (H)" data that can specify "is stored. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute any of the notice effects, “2000 (H)” that can specify “no effect” is stored in the data storage area of “prefetch effect execution variation designation” corresponding to the prefetch determination target. Are stored.

  When it is determined by the determination table in FIGS. 20A to 20C that the chance eye notice effect is not executed for the pre-reading judgment target as the reserved storage information corresponding to the new start winning prize, In the data storage area of “designation”, data of “3000 (H)” that can specify “no effect” is stored. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance eye notice effect is to be executed, the number of times before the chance eye notice effect is executed using the chance eye notice effect execution start change selection table of FIG. Furthermore, any type of chance eye notice effect pattern is selected and determined using the above-described chance eye notice effect mode selection table.

  Then, in order to execute the determined chance eye notice effect pattern in the data storage area of “chance eye notice effect mode designation” corresponding to the hold information before the hold information to be prefetched, the chance eye notice effect is executed. Data that can specify a pattern (3001 (H) to etc.) is stored. In FIG. 23, the pending storage information of buffer number 4 is the prefetch determination target, and it is determined that the chance eye notice effect is to be executed for the prefetch determination object, and all “chance eye notice effect mode designations” before the prefetch judgment object are determined. In the data storage area, an example is shown in which data of the first chance notice effect pattern is set.

  When it is determined according to the determination table of FIGS. 20D to 20F that the background change notice effect is not executed for the prefetch determination target as the stored storage information corresponding to the new start winning prize, the “background change notice effect” is displayed. In the data storage area of “designation”, data of “3000 (H)” that can specify “no effect” is stored. On the other hand, when it is determined that the background change notice effect is to be executed, the background change notice effect is executed from the previous fluctuation display time using the prefetch effect execution start change selection table of FIG. Furthermore, any type of background change notice effect pattern is selected and determined using the background change notice effect mode selection table described above.

  In order to execute the determined background change notice effect pattern in the data storage area of “background change notice effect type designation” corresponding to the hold information before the hold information to be prefetched, the background change notice effect is executed. Data (3101 (H) to etc.) that can specify the pattern is stored. In FIG. 23, the reserved storage information of the buffer number 4 is the prefetch determination target, and it is determined that the background change notice effect is to be executed for the prefetch determination target. In the data storage area, an example in which data of the first background change notice effect pattern is set is shown.

  When it is determined by the determination tables of FIGS. 20G to 20I that the hold change notice effect is not executed for the prefetch determination target as the hold memory information corresponding to the new start winning prize, In the data storage area of “designation”, data of “3000 (H)” that can specify “no effect” is stored. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold change notice effect is to be executed, the hold change notice effect is executed from the previous fluctuation display time using the prefetch effect execution start change selection table of FIG. Furthermore, any type of pending change notice effect pattern is selected and determined using the aforementioned pending change notice effect mode selection table.

  Then, in order to execute the determined hold change notice effect pattern in the data storage area of “hold change notice effect mode designation” corresponding to the hold information before the hold information to be prefetched, the hold change notice effect is executed. Data (3201 (H) to etc.) that can specify the pattern is stored. In FIG. 23, the hold storage information of the buffer number 4 is the prefetch determination target, and it is determined not to execute the hold change notice effect for the prefetch determination target. In the data storage area, an example in which data without effect is set is shown.

  In the data storage area of “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) execution variation designation” corresponding to each hold storage information, one of chance eye notice effect, background change notice effect, and hold change notice effect is executed. When it is determined that “2001H” that can specify “pre-reading effect execution variation designation” is stored, and when it is determined that no notice effect is to be performed, “no pre-reading effect execution variation designation” “2000H” is stored.

  When it is determined by the determination tables in FIGS. 20 (J) to 20 (L) that the zone advance notice effect is not executed for the pre-reading determination target as the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning prize, In the data storage area “4200 (H)”, the data “4200 (H)” that can specify “no effect” is stored. On the other hand, when it is determined that the zone notice effect is to be executed, any one of the first zone notice effect to the third zone notice effect is executed using the zone notice effect execution start change selection table of FIG. Furthermore, any type of zone notice effect pattern is selected and determined using the above-described zone notice effect mode selection table.

  Then, in order to execute the determined zone notice effect pattern in the data storage area of “zone notice effect form designation” corresponding to the hold information before the hold information to be prefetched, the zone notice effect pattern is specified. Possible data (4201 (H)) is stored. In FIG. 23, the storage information of the reserved zone notice effect mode selection table stored in the buffer number 4 is the prefetch determination target, and it is determined that the zone notice effect is not executed for the prefetch determination target. In the data storage area of “designation of production mode”, an example in which data without production is set is shown.

  Thus, in the effect buffer, “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) determination presence / absence”, “prefetch effect (other than zone notice effect) execution variation designation”, “chance eye notice effect mode designation”, “background change notice effect” By storing data as described above in the data storage areas of “specifying mode”, “pending change notice effect mode designation”, “zone notice effect determination presence / absence”, and “zone notice effect execution change designation” The effect control microcomputer 100 executes pre-reading effects such as a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, a hold change notice effect, and a zone notice effect based on checking such data. Is possible.

  FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the prefetching effect and the prefetching notification. Since the pre-reading notification is not performed, the relationship between the pre-reading notification and the pre-reading effect other than the zone notice effect will be described here. In FIG. 25, (A1), (B1), (C1), and (D1) show the relationship between the prefetching effect and the prefetching notification before the change display of the prefetch determination target. In FIG. 25, (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2) show a first example of the relationship between the prefetching effect and the pre-reading notification in the variable display after the prefetching determination target. In FIG. 25, (A3), (B3), (C3), and (D3) show a second example of the relationship between the prefetching effect and the pre-reading notification in the variable display after the prefetching determination target.

  As shown in (A1) to (D1), before the pre-reading determination target variation display, based on the pre-reading determination target, as a pre-reading effect, the chance eye notice effect is executed from the time of the three-time variation display before the pre-reading determination target Is started, and when it is decided to start the background change notice effect from the time of the change display three times before the prefetch determination target, a plurality of types of prefetch effects are executed as follows.

  As shown in (C1), the execution of the background notice effect is started simultaneously with the start of the change display three times before the prefetch determination target. Since this point in time is the start of the variable display, the chance eye notice effect is not executed. When a plurality of types of pre-reading effects are executed in response to one variation display in this way, as shown in (D1), pre-reading is in progress at the start of the pre-reading effect by the background notice effect that starts executing first. The execution of notification is started. As shown in (B1), the chance eye notice effect is executed at the time of the derivation display of the display result immediately before the end of the variable display three times before, the second time, and the previous time of the prefetch determination target.

  Thus, when a plurality of types of pre-reading effects are executed in response to one variation display, execution of the pre-reading notification is started at the start of the pre-reading effects by the background notice effect that is executed first. Therefore, the execution time of the pre-reading notification when a plurality of specific effects are executed can be set to an appropriate time.

  Further, when a specific effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuation displays as shown in (B1) and (C1), a pre-reading notification can be executed over a plurality of fluctuation displays as shown in (D1). As a result, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notification corresponding to the execution time of the prefetch effect, and it is possible to further improve the recognizability of the prefetch effect.

  Next, state control of the pre-reading notification at the time of variation display after the prefetch determination target will be described. When the variable display of the prefetch determination target is executed, when there is no reserved storage information that is determined to execute the next prefetch effect, it is shown in (A2), (B2), (C2), (D2). As described above, the background notice effect ends in correspondence with the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target as shown in (C2). At that time, the pre-reading notification is continued even after the variation display of the prefetch determination target ends, and is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variation display of the variation display of the prefetch determination target is started.

  Regarding the pre-reading notification, as shown in (D2), the pre-reading determination target when the pre-reading effect is executed is displayed by ending the pre-reading notification after the end of the pre-reading determination target variation display. The player can not easily identify which variation display, and the variation display of the pre-read determination target is not easily identified by the player, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In a conventional pachinko machine, when a pre-reading effect as a specific effect is executed, in particular, a variable display that results in a shift display instead of reaching reach, and a variable display that results in a shift display result after normal reach is achieved. In such a case, when the hold storage information for which the fluctuation display with a relatively low expectation level for the big hit is executed is the prefetch determination target (target), the prefetch effect is performed when the prefetch determination target fluctuation display is executed and ended. When finished, the player can easily recognize the change display of the pre-reading determination target, and there is a problem that the player has a sense of excitement and the interest of the game is reduced. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, when the pre-reading effect is executed by ending the pre-reading notification after the end of the variable display of the pre-read determination target, but not after the end. It is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing which variation display is the variation display of the prefetch determination target (recognition of the prefetch determination target can be reduced). Thereby, in this embodiment, it can relieve that a player has the above-mentioned feeling of excitement about a prefetching effect, and can suppress the fall of the interest of a game.

  In addition, when the change display of the prefetch determination target is executed, and there is pending storage information for which it is determined to execute the next prefetch effect, (A3), (B3), (C3), (D3) As shown in FIG. 5, as in the case where there is no reserved storage information, the pre-reading notification continues even after the change display of the prefetch determination target ends, and further, the change one time after the change display of the prefetch determination target. Even if a predetermined time elapses after the display is started, the display is continued until the next variable display corresponding to the prefetch determination target for which it is determined to execute the next prefetch effect is executed. .

  Thus, the pre-reading notification is continued during the period from the end of the variation display of the previous prefetch determination target to the start of the next variation display of the second prefetch determination target when there are a plurality of prefetch determination targets. Since the notification is executed in such a manner, the player has the impression that the pre-reading notice effect is continuously executed until the next pre-reading determination target variation display even after the previous pre-reading determination target variation display. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game between the plurality of pre-reading determination target variation displays.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the above-described prefetch effect process (S700). In the pre-reading effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following process.

  First, the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer for the first reserved memory shown in FIG. 22 are checked, and the first reserved memory in which it is undecided whether or not to execute the pre-read effect. It is determined whether or not there is (S711). For example, in the storage area for the presence / absence of the pre-reading effect (other than the zone notice effect), there is a data stored in the storage where “1000 (H)” is stored, or in the area for the presence / absence of the zone notice effect, “4100 (H It is determined whether there is pending storage data in which data “)” is stored.

  If it is determined in S711 that there is no first pending storage for which it is not determined whether to execute the prefetch effect, the process ends. On the other hand, in S711, when there is a first pending storage in which it is not determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, it is determined whether or not the current first reserved memory count is 2 or more. Confirmation is performed based on the first reserved storage number specified by the specified command (S712). In S712, when the first reserved memory number is less than 2, there is no first reserved memory information for executing the variable display before executing the variable display based on the new first reserved memory information, and the new first reserved memory Since there is no previous variable display that is the target of executing the prefetch effect based on the stored information, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display that executes the prefetch effect can be executed.

  If the current first reserved storage number is not 2 or more in S712, it is determined not to execute the prefetch effect (S727), and the process proceeds to S728 described later. On the other hand, when the current first reserved storage number is 2 or more in S712, the corresponding variation display result and variation type are confirmed in the start winning reception command buffer for the reserved storage information to be prefetched (S713). . Then, based on the variation display result and variation type confirmed in S713, a corresponding table is selected from the chance eye notice effect presence / absence determination table of FIGS. 20A to 20C, and the random number SR3 is extracted and selected. Based on the extracted value of the random number SR3, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance eye notice effect using the table (S717).

  Next, based on the change display result and change type confirmed in S713, the corresponding table is selected from the background change notice effect presence / absence determination table of FIGS. 20D to 20F, and the random number SR4 is extracted and selected. Based on the extracted value of the random number SR4, it is determined whether or not the background change notice effect is to be executed (S718).

  Next, based on the change display result and change type confirmed in S713, the corresponding table is selected from the hold change notice effect presence / absence determination table of FIGS. 20G to 20I, and the random number SR5 is extracted and selected. Based on the extracted value of the random number SR5, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold change notice effect using the table (S719).

  When it is determined that the hold change notice effect is to be executed, “determined” data is stored as data in the storage area of “presence / absence change effect determination presence / absence” for the first hold storage information to be read-ahead determination ( S720). If it is determined that the hold change notice effect is not to be executed, “no determination” data is stored as data in the storage area of “presence / absence of change effect determination such as hold”.

  Next, based on the determination results in S717 to S719, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute any pre-reading effect corresponding to the pre-read determination target (S721). If it is determined in S721 that no pre-reading effect is to be executed, “specified” as stored data of “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) execution variation designation” corresponding to the first hold storage information to be pre-readed. “None” is stored, and “Production” is stored as data for specifying various types of notice effects such as “Specify Chance Eye Notice Effect Style”, “Background Change Notice Effect Style Specification”, and “Hold Change Notice Effect Style Specification”. "None" data is stored (S726). Subsequently, zone notice effect processing is performed (S726A). The zone notice effect process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to S728.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S721 that any one of the pre-reading effects is to be executed, the fluctuation display result of the pre-stored determination target hold storage information is confirmed in the start winning reception command buffer (S722).

  Then, the pre-reading effect execution start variation selection table of FIG. 21 is selected for one or more pre-reading effects determined to be executed among the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect. Select and extract the random number SR5, and use the selected table to change the number of display times for starting the execution of the prefetching effect to be executed based on the extracted value of the random number SR5 one to three times before the prefetch determination target. A selection is made from the previous ones (S723).

  Next, for one or a plurality of pre-reading effects determined to execute the pre-reading effect among the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect, A selection is made for each type of effect (S724).

  Specifically, in S724, when it is determined to execute the chance eye notice effect, the random number SR6 for selecting the chance eye notice effect mode is extracted, the chance eye notice effect mode selection table is selected, and the random number SR6 is extracted. Based on the value, a chance eye notice effect pattern as a chance eye notice effect pattern is selected and determined from among a plurality of chance eye notice effects patterns. In S724, when it is determined to execute the background change notice effect, a random number SR7 for selecting a background change notice effect mode is extracted, a background change notice effect mode selection table is selected, and a random number SR7 is selected. Based on the extracted value, a background change notice effect pattern as a background change notice effect pattern is selected and determined from a plurality of background change notice effect patterns. In S724, when it is determined to execute the hold change notice effect, the random number SR8 for selecting the hold change notice effect mode is extracted, the hold change notice effect mode selection table is selected, and the random number SR8 is selected. On the basis of the extracted value, a pending change notice effect pattern as a pending change notice effect pattern is selected and determined from a plurality of pending change notice effects patterns.

  Next, according to the start time and the production mode of the pre-reading effect determined in S723 and S724, “pre-reading production (other than the zone notice production) execution variation designation”, “chance eye notice production mode designation”, “background change notice” Data is stored in a data storage area for various notice effect designations such as “designation style designation” and “pending change notice effect style designation” (S725), and the process proceeds to S728.

  Specifically, in S725, for the chance eye notice effect, as described above, in the data storage area before the prefetch determination target, data storage of “chance eye notice effect mode designation” for the number of variable display times determined in S723 is stored. In the area, data of a pre-reading effect mode that identifies the chance eye notice effect pattern determined in S724 is stored. In S725, for the background change notice effect, as described above, in the data storage area before the prefetch determination target, in the data storage area of the “background change notice effect mode designation” for the number of times of change display determined in S723, S724. The data of the pre-reading effect aspect which specifies the background change notice effect pattern determined in (1) is stored. In S725, as described above, with regard to the pending change notice effect, in the data storage area before the prefetch determination target, in the data storage area of the “pending change notice effect mode designation” for the number of variable display times determined in S723, S724. The data of the pre-reading effect aspect which specifies the pending change notice effect pattern determined in step S is stored.

  In S728, the random number SR8 for determining the pending display appearance color selection is extracted, and the pending display appearance color selection decision is made based on the extracted value of the random number SR8, using a predetermined data table for determining the pending display appearance color selection. In the data table, the selection ratio of “normal color (yellow) <white <blue <green <red” is selected when the big hit display result is obtained, and “normal color (yellow)> white” is obtained when the off display result is obtained. The data is set so as to have a selection ratio of “blue> green> red”.

  Next, for the first reserved storage information to be read-ahead judgment, a display is made to make the reserved image of the appearance reserved color selected and determined in S727 appear as a new reserved image (S729), and the process is terminated. In this way, in the pre-reading effect process, when new on-hold storage information is generated in response to a new start winning prize, the appearance hold color is selected and determined as the appearance hold display mode, and the newly determined appearance hold display mode is newly selected. The display which makes a reserve image appear in is performed. The hold image displayed in this manner is subjected to a hold shift operation by the hold storage display control process in S707 of FIG. 13 every time the variable display is executed, and the display position is shifted (moved).

  As described above, regarding the process of selecting and determining the appearance hold display mode (appearance hold color) when new hold storage information is generated in response to a new start winning prize, the hold storage display in S707 of FIG. In the control process, the appearance storage display mode may be selected and determined when executing the storage storage display control process.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the above-described zone notice effect process (S726A). In the zone notice effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following processing.

  First, based on the variation display result and variation type confirmed in S713, a corresponding table is selected from the zone notice effect presence / absence determination table in FIGS. 20J to 20L, and the random number SR11 is extracted and the selected table is selected. Is used to determine whether or not to execute the zone notice effect based on the extracted value of the random number SR11 (S751). If it is determined that the zone notice effect is to be executed, “determined” data is stored as the data in the storage area of “zone notice effect determination presence / absence” for the first hold storage information to be prefetched (S752). . If it is determined that the zone notice effect is not to be executed, “no determination” data is stored as the data in the storage area of “zone notice effect determination presence / absence”.

  Next, based on the determination result in S751, it is confirmed whether it is determined to execute the zone notice effect corresponding to the pre-read determination target (S753). When it is determined in S753 that the zone notice effect is not to be executed (NO in S753), the storage data of “zone notice effect execution variation designation” is stored in correspondence with the first hold storage information subject to the prefetch determination. The data of “no designation” is stored, and the data of “no production” is stored as the storage data of “zone notice production mode designation” (S754).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S753 that the zone notice effect is to be executed (YES in S753), the fluctuation display result for the pre-stored determination target hold storage information is confirmed in the start winning reception command buffer. Next, the effect mode of the zone notice effect to be executed is selected and determined for each type of prefetch effect (S755). Subsequently, the random number SR5 is extracted, and the zone notice effect to be executed is the first zone notice effect based on the extracted value of the random number SR5 using the zone notice effect execution start selection table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (S756).

  If the zone notice effect to be executed is the first zone notice effect in S756 (YES in S756), the shutter image is displayed (S757), and the zone notice effect process is terminated. When displaying the shutter image, a zone-dedicated or non-zone-dedicated character is displayed in front of the shutter image. When the zone notice effect to be executed is not the first zone notice effect (NO in S756), the zone notice effect process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display result is determined to be off (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the display result of the loss that does not become reach is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the loss symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 102 (S604). The process proceeds to S616A. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the symbols corresponding to the extracted numerical data are respectively left and center using the outlier design determination data table. , It is determined as a combination of stop symbols resulting in a variation display result of the right effect symbol. Thus, when determining a combination of non-reach off symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with a combination of accidental jackpot symbols, correction is made to be a combination of off symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by one symbol). In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally reached, it is corrected so as to be a combination of non-reach symbols (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by one symbol) and each stop symbol. Is determined.

  When it is determined in the process of S602 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the pattern is a reach variation pattern), a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616A. In the process of S605, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is extracted using the loss symbol determination data table. A symbol corresponding to a random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is determined as a stop symbol of the middle symbol, which is determined as a stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state. In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  In addition, when it is not decided to make a shift in the processing of S601 (when it is decided to make a big hit) (N in S601), the production control CPU 101 displays the big hit symbol according to the type of the big win. A stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the combination is determined (S603), and the process proceeds to S616A.

  In S603, the winning symbol combination is determined according to the type of jackpot as follows. Based on which display result designation command of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area, the type of jackpot between the probability big hit and the normal big hit When it is determined that it is determined to be a probability variation jackpot, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and probability variation jackpot symbol (for example, left, Use the data table (probability variable big hit symbol determination table) in which the relationship between the middle and right is an odd combination of odd numbers such as “7, 7, 7”, etc. The combination of is selected and determined. Also, when it is determined that it is determined to be a normal jackpot, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, middle, Using the data table (ordinary jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship with the right is a combination of even numbers such as “4,4,4” etc.), the combination of one of the normal jackpot symbols from the extracted value Select and decide. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, processing for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, various effects such as a variable symbol display effect (including a variable display mode such as a pseudo-ream), a change effect such as a hold, and a specific notice effect) After performing the effect setting process A (S616A) and the effect setting process B (S616B) for performing the effect setting process, the process proceeds to S617. The processing contents of the effect setting process A and the effect setting process B will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control is performed in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and various effect control (effect operations) patterns designated by the effect control patterns of the effects determined in the processing of S616A and S616B. Of the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as a use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when the change of the effect symbol is started until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. There are multiple types of data indicating the control content of various effect operations such as the effect change display operation of the symbol, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-reed effect, and the effect display operation in the notice effect. Stored.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series.

  Subsequently, the process table according to the production | presentation control pattern selected by S617 is selected (S618). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  When the process of S619 is executed, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as a production component is started (S620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of the light emitters such as various LEDs. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation processing (S802). A symbol variation start process is executed (S622). Then, the effect symbol variation start process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the aforementioned effect setting process A (S616A). In the effect setting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a variation display designated to execute a pre-read active change effect (active change effect) (S781). Specifically, in S780, in the effect buffer for the first on-hold storage shown in FIG. 23, “zone advance notice effect change designation” data corresponding to the on-hold storage information for executing the current fluctuation display is displayed. When the “execution variation designation” data is stored, it is determined that the variation display is designated to execute the zone notice effect. If it is determined in S781 that the display is not the variable display designated to execute the zone notice effect (NO in S781), the effect setting process ends.

  When it is determined in S781 that the display is a variable display for which the pre-reading effect is designated (YES in S781), the current variable display is held in the effect buffer for the first hold memory shown in FIG. Based on confirming the data of “zone notice effect mode designation” corresponding to the stored information, the effect mode of the zone notice effect to be executed this time is confirmed (S782). For example, when the zone notice effect mode “4201” is stored, the “zone notice effect execution pattern” is confirmed as the effect mode of the zone notice effect.

  Next, the effect pattern and execution timing of the zone notice effect to be executed are set based on the confirmation result of the effect mode of the zone notice effect executed in the current variation display in S782 (S783). Specifically, in S783, corresponding to the confirmed “zone notice effect mode designation” data, for example, in this variation display, which type of zone notice effect is executed in which effect pattern and at which timing. The production pattern of the zone notice production like this is set. The execution timing of the zone notice effect to be executed is determined using the zone notice effect execution start variation selection table of FIG. 21 (AB), and the effect start for each zone notice effect type set in the zone notice effect type table of FIG. It can be determined and set based on referring to the time.

  Subsequently, a post-shutter effect pattern is determined (S784). As shown in FIG. 31, as the effect patterns after the shutter is opened, “effect pattern 1 (without NR accessory operation)”, “effect pattern 2 (with NR accessory operation)”, “effect pattern 3 (for SR) "No accessory action)", "Direction pattern 4 (with SR accessory action)", "Direction pattern 5 (with SR accessory action)", "Direction pattern 6 (NR action two times)" There are 6 patterns.

  The “actor action” shown in the effect pattern after the shutter is opened is an action (hereinafter, referred to as “actual effect”) in which the movable effect member (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as effect) is tilted and the upper part of the effect is rocked. This is an effect (also referred to as a tilting action) (acting effect). Further, in FIG. 31, “for NR” means for normal reach, “for SR” means for super reach, and “community” means the effect object 60. The super reach is a reach that is executed after the normal reach and is developed from the normal reach.

“Production pattern 1 (no NR utility operation)” shown in FIG. 31 is a production pattern in which a normal reach without a tilting operation of the production accessory 60 is executed.
“Production pattern 2 (with NR accessory operation)” is an effect pattern in which the production accessory 60 tilts before normal reach, and normal reach is executed.
“Production pattern 3 (no SR accessory operation)” is an effect pattern in which a super reach is performed in which there is no tilting motion of the production accessory 60.
“Production pattern 4 (with SR action as action)” is an effect pattern in which the production work 60 tilts before normal reach, and super reach is executed.
“Production pattern 5 (with SR action as action)” is an effect pattern in which the action 60 is tilted after being developed into super reach.
The “effect pattern 6 (having the NR accessory operation twice)” is an effect pattern in which the effect agent performs a tilting operation twice before the normal reach and after the development to the super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (A), when the normal reach at the time of losing is executed, “effect pattern 1 (no NR accessory operation)” is executed at a rate of 98%, and “effect pattern 2 is set at a rate of 2%. In total, 100 numerical values are assigned to the post-shutter effect pattern determination random number SR21 (numerical value range of 0 to 100) so that “(NR function operation present)” is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (B), when the super-reach at the time of losing is executed, “effect pattern 3 (no SR accessory operation)” is executed at a rate of 60% and “effect pattern” is set at a rate of 20%. 4 (with SR action item operation) "is executed, and" Production pattern 5 (with SR operation object operation) "is executed at a rate of 15%, and" Production pattern 6 (NR use object) is executed at a rate of 5%. A total of 100 numerical values of the after-shutter opening effect pattern determining random number SR21 (numerical value range of 0 to 100) are allocated so that “operation is performed twice” is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 31C, when the big hit normal reach is executed, “effect pattern 1 (no NR accessory operation)” is executed at a rate of 40%, and “effect pattern 2 is set at a rate of 60%. In total, 100 numerical values are assigned to the post-shutter effect pattern determination random number SR21 (numerical value range of 0 to 100) so that “(NR function operation present)” is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 31D, when the super-reach at the time of losing is executed, “effect pattern 3 (no SR accessory operation)” is executed at a rate of 20%, and “effect pattern” is set at a rate of 30%. 4 (with SR action item operation) "is executed," Production pattern 5 (with SR operation object operation) "is executed at a rate of 20%, and" Production pattern 6 (NR use object) is executed at a rate of 30%. A total of 100 numerical values of the after-shutter opening effect pattern determining random number SR21 (numerical value range of 0 to 100) are allocated so that “operation is performed twice” is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to 31 (D), the effect pattern after opening the shutter is “effect pattern 1 <effect pattern 2”, “effect pattern 3 <effect pattern 4 <effect pattern 5” when the big hit display result is obtained. <Selection pattern 6> is a size-related selection ratio, and when the result is an off-line display result, "effect pattern 1> effect pattern 2", "effect pattern 3> effect pattern 4> effect pattern 5> effect pattern 6" The data is set so that the selection ratio is.

  Further, a change in BGM is executed according to each effect pattern. The relationship between each effect pattern and the content of BGM will be described later. Thus, the effect setting process A is completed.

  Next, the effect setting process B will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the aforementioned effect setting process B (S616B). In the effect setting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a variation display designated to execute the pre-reading active change effect (S630). Specifically, in S630, in the effect buffer for the first reserved memory shown in FIG. 20 (B), “prefetch effect (other than the zone notice effect) execution change designation corresponding to the hold storage information for executing the current change display is performed. When “pre-reading effect execution variation is specified” data is stored as the data “”, it is determined that the display is a variation display that is designated to execute the pre-reading effect. In S630, when it is determined that the display is not the variable display in which the pre-reading effect is designated (N in S630), the process proceeds to S637 described later.

  When it is determined in S630 that the display is a variable display in which the pre-reading effect is designated (Y in S630), the current variable display is held in the effect buffer for the first hold memory shown in FIG. A pre-reading effect to be executed this time based on confirming the data of “chance eye notice effect mode designation”, “background change notice effect style designation” and “hold change notice effect style designation” corresponding to the stored information The effect mode is confirmed (S631).

  Next, based on the confirmation result of the effect mode of the pre-reading effect executed in the current variation display in S631, the effect pattern and execution timing of the pre-reading effect to be executed are set (S632), and the process proceeds to S633. Specifically, in S632, for example, in response to the confirmed “chance eye notice effect mode designation”, “background change notice effect style designation”, and “hold change notice effect style designation” data, In the display, an effect pattern of a pre-reading effect is set such as which kind of pre-reading effect is executed with which effect pattern and at which timing. In this case, the type of the pre-reading effect to be executed can be determined and set based on whether or not the data of these effect mode designation areas in the effect buffer is data other than “3000 (H)”. . The effect pattern of the pre-reading effect to be executed can be determined and set based on the data of the effect pattern stored in the data of the effect mode designation area of the effect buffer. The execution timing of the prefetch effect to be executed can be determined and set based on referring to the effect start time for each prefetch effect type set in the prefetch effect type table of FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notification flag is set (S633). The pre-reading notification flag is a flag that is set when the pre-reading notification is being executed in response to the execution of the prefetching effect, and is set in S635 described later.

  When it is determined in S633 that the pre-reading notification flag is not set (N in S633), the execution of the pre-reading notification is started in response to the pre-reading effect to be executed, and the pre-reading effect to be executed is determined. In accordance with the type, the effect pattern and execution timing of the pre-reading notification effect are set (S634). For example, when the chance eye notice effect is executed, the pre-reading notification is set to be executed from the end of the variable display. When the background change notice effect is executed, the pre-reading notification is set to be executed from the start of the variable display. When the hold change notice effect is executed, the pre-read notification is set to be executed from the hold change time during the variable display. Further, when a plurality of types of prefetch effects are executed during one-variable display, as shown in FIGS. 16A1, 16B1, C1, and D1, when the prefetch effect with the earlier execution timing is started. Set to start production during prefetching.

  Also, in S634, when any type of prefetching effect is executed, the common prefetching notification that displays the common prereading notification image 94 shown in FIG. A pattern is set. Thereby, the control process when performing the pre-reading notification can be simplified. In S634, the pre-reading notification for displaying the common pre-reading notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 is executed regardless of the type of the prefetching effect when any type of prefetching effect is executed. A production pattern is set. This makes it possible to check whether or not the pre-reading notification is being executed by the player based on the presence or absence of the display of the pre-reading notification effect, thereby further recognizing a plurality of types of pre-reading effects. Can be improved.

  Further, in S634, when any one of the plurality of chance eye notice effect patterns is executed and when any one of the plurality of background change notice effect patterns is executed, a plurality of suspensions are held. When any one of the change notice effect patterns is executed, any kind of pre-read effect is executed in which the common pre-read notification that displays the common pre-read notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 is executed. The Thus, the player can perform any kind of effect mode (effect pattern) included in each prefetch effect for each prefetch effect of the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect. However, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pre-reading notification is being executed based on the presence or absence of the display of the pre-reading notification effect, so that the recognizability of the pre-reading effect can be further improved. Further, it is possible to simplify the control processing when executing the pre-reading notification.

  Next, a pre-reading notification flag is set (S635), and the process proceeds to S642. Further, when it is determined in S633 that the pre-reading notification flag is set (Y in S633), the display of the current variation display is confirmed by checking the “designation” data in the effect buffer of FIG. It is determined whether or not the result is a jackpot display result (S636).

  When it is determined in S636 that the jackpot display result will not be obtained (N in S636), the pre-reading notification effect currently being executed is continued during the current variable display, and the pre-read notification effect is changed after the end of the variable display. Is set in advance so as to continue (S636A), and the process proceeds to S642. As a result, when the current fluctuation display becomes an outlier display result, the pre-reading notification is executed in a manner that continues until the next fluctuation display as shown in FIG. 25 (D2).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S636 that the jackpot display result is obtained (Y in S636), the pre-reading notification effect currently being executed is continued during the current variable display, and the pre-read notification effect is changed to the end of the variable display. An effect pattern for informing during prefetching that is sometimes ended is set (S636B), and the process proceeds to S642. As a result, when the current variation display becomes a jackpot display result, the pre-reading notification is executed in a manner that does not continue until the next variation display.

  In S636, S636A, and S636B, when the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the prefetch determination target, the pre-reading notification is ended at the end of the variable display, but it becomes a miss display result and the big hit gaming state is set. When it is not controlled, the notice during pre-reading is ended after the end of the variation display, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the pre-judgment target variation display is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  When it is determined in S630 that the display is not the variable display for which the pre-reading effect is designated, and the process proceeds to S637, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notification flag is set (S637). If it is determined in S637 that the pre-reading notification flag is not set (N in S637), the process proceeds to S642. On the other hand, when it is determined in S637 that the pre-reading notification flag is set (Y in S637), the pre-reading notification is being executed corresponding to the pre-reading effect that has already been executed, as shown in FIG. By checking the effect buffer, it is determined whether or not there is a plan to execute the next prefetch effect after the current variation display in the first reserved storage information (S638).

  When it is determined in S638 that there is no plan to execute the next prefetching effect after the current fluctuation display (N in S638), the prefetching notification flag is reset (S639), and a predetermined period from the start of the current fluctuation display. (For example, about 5 seconds) An effect pattern for ending the pre-reading notification effect at the elapse of time is set (S640), and the process proceeds to S642.

  Therefore, the pre-reading notification corresponding to the pre-reading effect is executed in a manner that continues until the next fluctuation display by S636A even when the fluctuation display of the prefetch determination target is executed, and as the first hold storage information by S638 to S640. When there is no scheduled execution of the next prefetching effect, it continues until a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the prefetching determination target one time later.

  In this way, by ending the pre-reading notification after the end of the pre-reading determination target variation display, not the end of the pre-reading determination target variation display, the player can determine which variation display is the pre-read determination target variation display when the pre-reading effect is executed. However, it becomes difficult to identify the change display of the pre-reading determination target, and it is difficult for the player to identify the variation display of the prefetch determination target.

  In addition, when the big hit gaming state is not controlled based on the display result of the variation display of the prefetch determination target, the big hit gaming state is triggered by the variation display of the prefetch determination target by terminating the prefetching notification after the end of the variation display. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when it is not controlled.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S638 that the next pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed after the current variation display (Y in S638), the pre-reading notification flag is not reset, and the pre-reading notification effect currently being executed is performed. Is set during the current variable display, and the pre-reading notification effect pattern is set to continue the notification during the pre-reading notification even after the end of the variable display (S641), and the process proceeds to S642.

  As described above, when there are a plurality of prefetch determination targets, the variation display of the second prefetch determination target for which the variation display is performed later from the end of the variation display of the first prefetch determination target for which the variation display is performed first. Since the pre-reading notification is executed in a manner that continues during the period until the start time, the specific effect is continuously executed until the subsequent pre-reading determination target variation display even after the previous pre-reading determination target variation display ends. It is possible to give the player an impression as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game between the variable display of a plurality of prefetch determination targets.

  Next, in S642, a process of setting various other effects other than the above-described pre-reading effect and the pre-reading notification effect is executed (S642). Thereafter, the effect setting process ends.

  Based on the setting of the effect control based on the execution of the process of S632 in such an effect setting process, the effect pattern changing process (S802) shown in FIG. Thus, any one or more of the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect as shown in FIG. 16 are executed.

  Further, based on the setting of the effect control based on the execution of the processes of S634, S636A, S636B, S640, and S641 in the effect setting process, the effect symbol changing process shown in FIG. 14 (S802) is set in S632. Based on the effect pattern, the effect of the pre-read notification as shown in FIG. 17 is executed.

  Next, a specific flow of production when the zone notice production is executed will be described. First, the first zone notice effect will be described. FIG. 32 is a time chart showing an effect mode of the first zone notice effect, and FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flow of the first zone notice effect. Here, a case where the first zone notice effect is executed with the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the first zone notice effect is started when a game ball that generates the first zone notice effect is received. At this time, a shutter image is displayed on the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 300S is displayed, and a fully closed shutter image is displayed. Further, when the target change starts, the state where the closed shutter image 300S is displayed is switched to the state where the shutter image 300S is opened and the shutter image is not displayed. Before the target change is started, a shutter closing zone notice effect in which a completely closed shutter image 300S is displayed is executed.

  When the target change starts, the special background image 300T (see FIG. 18B) is further displayed, and the zone notice effect after shutter release is executed. After the shutter is released, the zone notice effect is executed, and the BGM executed in the BGM effect is switched from the normal BGM (normal BGM) to the zone notice effect BGM (hereinafter referred to as zone BGM). Subsequently, the process proceeds to normal reach and super reach. During this time, the display of the special background table image 300T and the BGM are not switched. After that, when the effect accessory 60 tilts, the BGM switches from the zone BGM to the super reach BGM (SR BGM, hereinafter referred to as “super BGM”).

  The flow up to this point will be described with reference to FIG. 33. In the normal effect before the first zone notice effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. An image in which the decorative pattern 5L, the decorative pattern 5C in the middle, and the decorative pattern 5R on the right are displayed in a variable manner is displayed. At this time, a BGM effect in which normal BGM is output from the speaker 27 (hereinafter referred to as a normal BGM effect) is executed as the BGM effect. The normal BGM is a BGM in which gentle music flows, for example.

  When the first zone notice effect is started while the normal effect is being executed, first, the shutter closing zone notice effect is started. In the shutter closing zone notice effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the shutter image 300S is displayed from the left and right sides of the effect display device 9, and the left decorative symbol 5L, the central decorative symbol 5C, and the right are displayed by the shutter image. The decorative pattern 5R is hidden. Further, in the normal effect, the effect display device 9 displays the normal effect image together with the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R, but these effect images are also hidden. It is. The shutter image 300S is displayed on the zone effect display layer shown in FIG. Therefore, when the shutter image 300S is completely displayed, the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are hidden in the shutter image 300S as shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 33B, the left decorative symbol 5L and the right decorative symbol 5R out of the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are hidden by the shutter image 300S. Show. When the shutter image 300S is displayed, the small symbol image 300A and the hold image H are displayed in the small symbol display area shown in FIG. The small symbol image 300A displays an image having the same symbol as the left ornament symbol 5L, the middle ornament symbol 5C, and the right ornament symbol 5R. When some or all of the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are displayed in a variable manner, the same variable display is also performed in the small symbol image 300A. The small symbol image 300A is displayed at the time of the shutter closing zone notice effect where the shutter image 300S is displayed. Further, the hold image H may be displayed at a time other than the shutter closing zone notice effect. Although the shutter closing zone notice effect may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations, when the hold image H is displayed, the effect display device 9 is visually recognized to end the one fluctuation. It has come to understand. When the shutter notice effect is started, the BGM output from the speaker as the BGM effect is switched from the normal BGM to the BGM effect (hereinafter referred to as zone BGM) from which the zone BGM is output. The zone BGM is, for example, a BGM that has a faster tempo than the normal BGM and enhances the player's feeling of exhilaration over the normal BGM.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 33C, when the shutter image 300S covers the entire surface of the effect display device 9, a chance image 300Z made up of characters “CHANCE ZONE” is displayed in front of the shutter image 300S. At this time, the zone BGM effect is executed as the BGM effect.

  When the chance image 300Z composed of the characters “CHANCE ZONE” is displayed for a predetermined time, for example, 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 33 (D), the first special character 300C1 and the second special character are displayed on the front surface of the shutter image 300S. The character 300C2, the third special character, etc. (see FIG. 33D) are displayed while being switched while changing the pose and clothes. The first special character 300C1, the second special character 300C2, the third special character, and the like may be characters displayed in a normal effect, or may be characters used only in the first zone notice effect. At this time, the zone BGM is executed as the BGM effect.

  Subsequently, when target variation display starts, as shown in FIG. 33E, an image with the shutter image 300S opened is displayed, and subsequently, a zone notice effect after shutter release is executed. In the zone notice effect after the shutter is released, as shown in FIG. 33 (F), the effect display device 9 displays the decorative pattern 5L on the left and the decorative pattern 5C in the middle corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information of the target. The decorative pattern 5R on the right is variably displayed. At this time, special background images 300T are displayed on the upper and lower portions of the effect display device 9, respectively. The special background image 300T is displayed together with the left decorative design 5L, the middle decorative design 5C, the right decorative design 5R, a background image in a normal effect, and the like. In a state where the special background image 300T is not displayed, the same effect as the effect executed at the normal time is executed. Special background image 300T is displayed on the zone effect display layer shown in FIG. By displaying the special background image 300T, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is after the zone notice effect has been executed. At this time, the zone BGM is executed as the BGM effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (G), when the left decorative symbol 5L and the right decorative symbol 5R are stopped and displayed with the same number, and the central decorative symbol 5C is in a fluctuating state, a reach state is established. The zone notice effect (zone notice effect after shutter release) ends, and the process proceeds to reach effect after the first zone notice effect ends. Hereinafter, reach (reach state, reach effect) after zone notice effect is referred to as special reach (special reach state, special reach effect). Special reach also includes normal reach and super reach, which are referred to as special normal reach (special normal reach state, special normal reach production) and special super reach (special super reach state, special super reach production). The reach state shown in FIG. 32F is a special normal reach state. Even after shifting to the special normal reach state, the special background image 300T remains displayed, and the BGM output from the speaker 27 as the BGM effect remains in the zone BGM.

  After the special normal reach state, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 33 (H), the state shifts to the special super reach state. Special super reach includes special lower super reach (special lower super reach state, special lower super reach production) and special upper super reach (special upper super reach state, special upper super reach production). Move to reach. In the special lower super reach state, the decorative symbols are not displayed, and the justice side super reach character 300M1 and the enemy side super reach character 300E1 are displayed. Even after the transition from the special normal reach state to the special lower super reach state, the special background image 300T remains displayed, and the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect.

  Thereafter, when the special lower super reach is performed, as shown in FIG. 33 (I), when the stage effect 60 performs a tilting operation, the special lower super reach shifts to the special upper super reach. When shifting from the special lower super reach to the special upper super reach, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to the BGM effect in which the super BGM is output from the speaker 27 (hereinafter referred to as a super BGM effect). The super BGM is a BGM that further enhances the player's sense of excitement as compared to the zone BGM. In addition, the special display image 300T remains displayed on the effect display device 9.

  After performing the tilting operation, the effect accessory 60 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 33 (A) and the like as shown in FIG. 33 (J). In addition, when the special upper superreach is executed, the effect display device 9 displays the right-side modified super-reach character 300M2 in which the right-side super-reach character M1 is changed and the enemy-side modified super-reach character 300E2. The At this time, the special background image 300T is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the BGM effect is a super BGM.

  Next, the second zone notice effect will be described. FIG. 34 is a time chart showing the effect mode of the second zone notice effect, and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of the second zone notice effect. Here, a case where the second zone notice effect is executed with the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the second zone notice effect is started when reach (normal reach) is established when target variation is being executed. When reach is established and normal reach is started, the shutter image 300S starts to be displayed on the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 18A, and a completely closed shutter image is displayed. Subsequently, the state where the closed shutter image 300S is displayed is switched to the state where the shutter image 300S is opened and the shutter image is not displayed. The time during which the closed shutter image 300S is displayed is a short time, for example, about 1 second.

  When the shutter image 300S is no longer displayed, a special background image 300T (see FIG. 18B) is further displayed. As described above, in the second zone notice effect, the zone notice effect during the shutter closing and the zone notice effect after the shutter is opened are continuously executed. Further, the BGM output from the speaker 27 is switched from the normal BGM to the zone BGM. Subsequently, the process proceeds to normal reach and super reach. During this time, the display of the special background table image 300T and the BGM are not switched. Thereafter, when the effect accessory 60 tilts, the BGM is switched from the zone BGM to the super BGM.

  The flow up to this point will be described with reference to FIG. 35. As shown in FIG. 35A, in the effect display device 9, the left decorative symbol 5L, the central decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are displayed in a variable manner. From the state where the image to be displayed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the left decorative design 5L and the right decorative design 5R are stopped and displayed with the same numbers, and the internal decorative design 5C is in a fluctuating state. Reach. Up to this point, the BGM effect is a normal BGM effect.

  When the reach state is reached, as shown in FIG. 35C, shutter images 300S are respectively displayed from the left and right sides of the effect display device 9, and the left decorative pattern 5L, the decorative pattern 5C in the middle, and the right are displayed by the shutter image 300S. The decorative pattern 5R and the normal effect image are hidden. At this time, the BGM effect is switched from the normal BGM to the zone BGM.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, the shutter image 300S has been kept closed until the display variation of the target is started. Therefore, the shutter image 300S may continue for a long time, for example, from several seconds to several minutes, but the example shown in FIG. Then, the state in which the image with the shutter image 300S closed is displayed is very short, for example, about 1 second. However, the state in which the image with the shutter image 300S closed is displayed may be shorter than 1 second. For example, the time when the player can recognize that the image with the shutter image 300S closed is displayed, for example, about 100 ms. Alternatively, it may be longer than 1 second, for example, about 3 seconds or 5 seconds.

  The period between the time when the shutter image 300S is closed and the time when the open image is displayed is the shutter closing zone notice effect. For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 35, the shutter closing zone advance notice is completed in a very short time. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35D, an image in which the shutter image 300S is released is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 35E, characters “CHANCE ZONE” are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (F), the process shifts to a reach effect (special normal reach effect), and special background images 300T are displayed on the upper and lower portions of the effect display device 9 together with the reach effect. For this reason, in the second zone notice effect, the notice effect after the shutter is released is not executed, and the second zone notice effect is configured only by the zone notice during shutter closing.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35G, the special normal reach is developed to the special super reach (special lower super reach). For the special normal reach and the special super reach, an effect common to the example shown in FIG. 33 is executed. While the special lower level reach is executed after the special normal reach is executed, the zone BGM effect is executed as the BGM effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (H), when the stage effect 60 performs a tilting operation, the special lower superreach is shifted to the special upper superreach. When shifting from the special lower super reach to the special upper super reach, the BGM production is switched from the zone BGM production to the super BGM production. In addition, the special display image 300T remains displayed on the effect display device 9.

  After performing the tilting operation, the effect accessory 60 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 33 (A) and the like as shown in FIG. 35 (I). In addition, when the special upper superreach is executed, the effect display device 9 displays the right-side modified super-reach character 300M2 in which the right-side super-reach character M1 is changed and the enemy-side modified super-reach character 300E2. The At this time, the special background image 300T remains displayed on the effect display device 9, and the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect.

  Next, the third zone notice effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a time chart showing the effect mode of the third zone notice effect, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of the third zone notice effect. Here, a case where the second zone notice effect is executed with the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the third zone notice effect is started when the target change is executed and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the normal reach is changed to the super reach, the shutter image 300S starts to be displayed on the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 18A, and a fully closed shutter image is displayed. Subsequently, the state where the closed shutter image 300S is displayed is switched to the state where the shutter image 300S is opened and the shutter image is not displayed. The time during which the closed shutter image 300S is displayed is a short time, for example, about 1 second.

  When the shutter image 300S is no longer displayed, a special background image 300T (see FIG. 18B) is further displayed. As described above, in the third zone notice effect, the zone notice effect during shutter closing and the zone notice effect after shutter release are continuously executed. Further, the BGM effect is switched from the normal BGM effect to the zone BGM effect. Subsequently, although super reach is executed, the display of the special background table image 300T and the BGM are not switched during this period. Thereafter, when the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the effect display device 9, from the state in which the image in which the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are displayed in a variable manner is displayed, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the left decorative design 5L and the right decorative design 5R are stopped and displayed with the same numbers, and when the central decorative design 5C is in a changing state, a reach state is entered.

  After reaching the reach state, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), the decorative pattern 5C in the middle temporarily stops and then develops into super reach. When developing to super reach, as shown in FIG. 37D, shutter images 300S are respectively displayed from the left and right sides of the effect display device 9, and the left decorative symbol 5L, the central decorative symbol 5C, and the right are displayed by the shutter image 300S. The decorative pattern 5R and the normal effect image are hidden. At this time, the BGM effect is switched from the normal BGM effect to the zone BGM effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37 as well as the example shown in FIG. 35, the state in which the image with the shutter image 300S closed is displayed is very short, for example, about 1 second. However, the state in which the image with the shutter image 300S closed is displayed may be shorter or longer than 1 second. In the example shown in FIG. 37, as in the example shown in FIG. 35, the notice effect after the shutter is released is not executed, and the zone notice effect is configured only by the zone notice during shutter closing.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (E), an image in which the shutter image 300S is opened is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 37 (F), characters “CHANCE ZONE” are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (G), when an image with the shutter image 300S opened is displayed, special super reach (special lower super reach) is executed. For the special super reach, an effect common to the example shown in FIG. 33 is executed. While the special low-order super reach is being executed, the zone BGM effect is being executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (H), when the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation, the special lower superreach is shifted to the special upper superreach. When shifting from the special lower super reach to the special upper super reach, the BGM production is switched from the zone BGM production to the super BGM production. In addition, the special display image 300T remains displayed on the effect display device 9.

  After performing the tilting operation, the effect accessory 60 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 33A and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, when the special upper superreach is executed, the effect display device 9 displays the right-side modified super-reach character 300M2 in which the right-side super-reach character M1 is changed and the enemy-side modified super-reach character 300E2. The At this time, the special background image 300T remains displayed on the effect display device 9, and the BGM effect remains in the zone BGM.

  Next, as compared with the production pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31, when there is no action of the effect 60 (production pattern 3), the action of the effect 60 is not developed to super reach. When there is no action (effect pattern 1), when there is an accessory action before the normal reach (effect pattern 2), when there is an action action of the effect object 60 twice before the normal reach and after the start of the super reach (effect pattern) 6) will be described. Here, a case will be described in which an effect in each effect pattern is executed in the first zone notice effect.

  FIG. 38 is a time chart showing the effect mode when the first zone notice effect is executed in effect pattern 3. As shown in FIG. 38, the effect pattern 3 of the first zone notice effect is executed until the time of super reach development, as compared with the effect pattern 5 of the first zone notice effect shown in FIG. After the development to super reach (special super reach), in the production pattern 5 shown in FIG. 32, the production role 60 performs a tilting action, and the BGM production is switched from the zone BGM production to the super BGM production, as shown in FIG. In the effect pattern 3, the effect object 60 does not tilt, and the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect and does not switch to the super BGM effect. As described above, when the effect accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM effect is not changed.

  Even in the second zone notice effect and the third zone notice effect, if the effect object 60 does not tilt during the special super reach, the BGM effect remains as the zone BGM effect and becomes the super BGM effect. There is no switching.

  FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an effect mode when the first zone notice effect is executed in effect pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 39, the effect pattern 1 of the first zone notice effect is compared with the effect pattern 5 of the first zone notice effect shown in FIG. 32, and the same effect is executed until the time of super reach development. In the production pattern 5 shown in FIG. 32, there is a development to super reach. However, in the production pattern 3 shown in FIG. 39, there is no development to super reach, and there is no tilting action of the production accessory 60 during super reach. In this case, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect and does not switch to the super BGM effect. As described above, when there is no development to super reach and the production accessory 60 does not tilt, the BGM production is not changed.

  In addition, in the second zone notice effect and the third zone notice effect, if there is no development to super reach and the effect object 60 does not tilt, the BGM effect remains as the zone BGM effect. There is no switch to BGM production.

  FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an effect mode when the first zone notice effect is executed in the effect pattern 2. As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect pattern 2 of the first zone notice effect, the effect object 60 performs the tilting operation during the normal reach, and there is no development to the super reach, so the effect object 60 during the super reach. Does not tilt. When the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation during normal reach, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect as shown in FIG. As described above, even when the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation, when the super reach (special super reach) is not being performed, and when the normal reach is being performed, the BGM effect is not changed.

  In addition, in the second zone notice effect and the third zone notice effect, if there is no development to super reach and the effect object 60 does not tilt, the BGM effect remains as the zone BGM effect. There is no switch to BGM production. Further, even if the effect accessory 60 performs the tilting operation during the normal effect before the normal reach, the BGM effect may not be switched.

  FIG. 41 is a time chart showing the effect mode when the zone notice effect is executed in the effect pattern 6. Here, a case will be described in which execution of the zone notice effect starts when winning the first start opening. As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect pattern 2 of the first zone notice effect, the effect 60 for effect twice in the normal reach and the super reach (special super reach) performs the tilting operation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41, in the case where the effector 60 performs the tilting operation during the normal reach, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect, and the effector is used during the superreach (special superreach). When the object 60 tilts, the BGM effect switches from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect. In this way, even when the effector 60 performs the tilting motion twice, when the super reach (special super reach) is not being performed, and when the normal reach is being performed, the BGM does not change and the super reach (special When the effect accessory 60 performs the tilting operation twice during (super reach), the BGM effect is changed.

  In addition, in the second zone notice effect and the third zone notice effect, if there is no development to super reach and the effect object 60 does not tilt, the BGM effect remains as the zone BGM effect. There is no switch to BGM production. Further, even if the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation during the normal effect before the normal reach, the BGM effect may not be switched.

  In each zone notice effect described above, the normal BGM, the zone BGM, and the super BGM may be appropriate music, speech, sound effects, or a combination thereof. In addition, the normal BGM, the zone BGM, and the super BGM may be different types (modes) of music. For example, as a normal BGM or a zone BGM, a music piece that only plays a musical instrument may be used, and in a super BGM, a music piece that includes vocals may be used. Or it is good also as a music which the musical instrument to use increases as it progresses to normal BGM, zone BGM, and super BGM. Also, as the super BGM, different types of music may be used depending on whether or not the zone notice effect has been passed. This makes it possible to appeal to the player that an effect corresponding to a situation with a higher expectation is being executed, for example, by switching the music containing the vocal only when the zone notice effect is passed.

  In each zone notice, the shutter image 300S and the special background image 300T are displayed, but the pre-reading notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 may be displayed together with the shutter image 300S and the special background image 300T. . Further, in the zone notice effect, the special background image 300T is displayed after the shutter image 300S is displayed at the timing such as the first start opening winning, the reach establishment, or the super reach development, but the shutter image 300S is displayed. Alternatively, the special background image 300T may be displayed at the timing when the shutter image 300S is displayed. Further, the shutter image 300S may be displayed a plurality of times (two times or more).

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, at least during the execution of the variable display, an adjustment unit that can adjust the effect according to the adjustment operation by the player, and an adjustment image that displays an adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment unit for a predetermined period. A display means, and when the adjustment image display means derives and displays the variable display result within a predetermined period, the adjustment image cannot be viewed or is visible during the period during which the variable display result is derived and displayed. A pachinko gaming machine provided with specific notification means that is difficult will be described. In addition, about the part etc. which are common in 1st Embodiment, a common code | symbol may be attached | subjected and the description may be abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the effect image showing the change effect character displayed on the change effect display layer shown in FIG. 19 is arranged at an overlapping position on the front side with respect to the effect image showing the effect symbol serving as the identification information image. Can do. The plurality of layers may include an error image display layer. For example, by setting the Z value so that the error image display layer is arranged in front of the small symbol display layer, the priority of the error image (see FIGS. 43 (D1) and (D2)) can be changed. You may make it make it higher than the production image.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of effect effect setting processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. 43 is a display screen diagram of effect display executed in response to the effect effect setting process in the effect display device 9.

  For example, in the effect control process as shown in FIG. 14, the effect effect setting process is executed after the pre-read effect process (S700) as a process different from S800 to S807 related to the series of effect control processes.

  In this embodiment, by performing the effect effect setting process described below, during the game (FIG. 43 (A)) or during the customer waiting demonstration display (FIG. 43 (B)), the player's adjustment operation is performed. The volume as a production effect can be adjusted. Further, when the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R indicating the volume adjustment result is displayed in a manner superimposed on the effect image and the demo image in a predetermined area of the effect display device 9. As shown in FIGS. 43A, 43B, and C2, the adjustment result image R is displayed, for example, in a bar graph display mode that increases or decreases in the left-right direction. Note that the mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode that displays a numerical value or a character corresponding to the volume, a pie chart mode, or the like.

  In this embodiment, in the menu mode, when the “volume adjustment” item is selected from the menu screen (FIG. 43 (C1)) and the volume adjustment mode is selected (FIG. 43 (C2)). It is possible to adjust the volume only. While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. In addition, as will be described later, in response to receiving a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demonstration display, the menu mode is shifted from the customer waiting demonstration display.

  When the effect effect setting process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the menu mode is being executed (SA701). For example, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the menu mode is being executed when the menu mode execution flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed when the flag is off.

  When the menu mode is not being executed (SA701; No), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the adjustment result image display flag is on (SA702). The adjustment result image display flag is set to an on state at SA708 and SA715, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state at SA704 and SA712.

  When the adjustment result image display flag is on (SA702; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined period T1 that has been determined in advance has elapsed since the adjustment operation was received (SA703). Here, the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) is an operation performed by the player using an operation means such as a stick controller 122, for example, and in this embodiment, is an operation for adjusting the volume as a production effect. . The player adjusts the volume from within a predetermined range (for example, six levels 1 to 6) by tilting the stick controller 122 to the left and right, for example, and the volume at the time when the tilt operation is stopped. The volume is determined as an adjustment result.

  Note that the sound volume determination operation may be performed by pushing and pulling the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 or pressing the push button 120 separately from the adjustment operation. Further, the operation means for adjusting the sound volume is not limited to the stick controller 122, and may be a cross key, a dial type operation means or the like not shown. In addition, instead of the operation means, a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photo sensor) may be used to adjust the production effect by the player's adjustment operation detected by the sensor.

  The predetermined period T1 is set in advance as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the adjustment result of the volume. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as it is an appropriate period for the player to confirm the adjustment result. In this embodiment, the predetermined period T1 is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 to 10 seconds). Note that whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the acceptance of the adjustment operation corresponds to, for example, a predetermined timer corresponding to the predetermined period T1 when it is determined that there is an adjustment operation (SA706; Yes) in later-described SA706. Set a value and determine if the timer has timed out.

  The adjustment operation (adjustment operation) may be an operation for adjusting the display luminance (light quantity) of the effect display device 9 or the effect effect lamp as an effect. Then, the adjustment result image R may indicate a luminance adjustment result. Moreover, what is necessary is just to adjust at least one of a volume and a brightness | luminance according to adjustment operation. Further, the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image corresponding to the volume is displayed and the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image according to the luminance is displayed may be set to the same length or different lengths. May be.

  Here, an example of the case where the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the effect display device 9 when the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect.

  When the effect symbol variation display (variation) is executed and the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 44A, a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and thereafter, FIG. The development notification image to the super reach is performed by displaying the development notification image (“Super reach!” In the illustrated example) on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. When the player performs an adjustment operation during the change, the adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the effect display device 9 (corresponding to SA710) as shown in FIG.

  Following such development notification, the operation promotion image P is displayed during the execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. Then, when the operation with the push button 31B is performed, a predetermined cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. Note that, when the operation with the push button 31B is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44E, for example, the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

  Until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, the adjustment result image R is erased (corresponding to SA712) as shown in FIG. 44 (E) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the fluctuation display result that is derived and displayed.

About 2nd Embodiment, it can be said that the following means structures are provided.
(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of displaying a variation of identification information and deriving and displaying a display result, and adjusting operation (adjustment operation) by a player at least during execution of variation display ) According to the adjustment means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 for executing the processing of SA706 and SA707) and the adjustment images (for example, FIGS. 44B to 44D) corresponding to the adjustment by the adjustment means. Adjustment image display means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 for executing the processing of SA708, SA703, and SA704) that displays the adjustment result image R) shown in FIG. 4 for a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T1). When the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, the period during which the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period (for example, The adjustment image cannot be viewed in the derived display period T2) (for example, the effect control CPU 101 executes the processing of SA710 to SA712) or difficult to view (for example, the adjustment image is displayed semi-transparently or blinked) ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variation display result derived and displayed.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (for example, see FIG. 43A). Also good. According to such a configuration, since the adjusted image result image that overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is deleted, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the visibility of the variable display result.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the error image may not be deleted even during the derivation display of the variable display result (for example, see FIG. 43 (D2)). According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  (4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), priority is given to the display of the error image over the display of the adjusted image (the effect control CPU 101 that has received the abnormality notification command indicates the command. Until the error is resolved, the display of the error image as shown in FIGS. 43D1 and 43D2 may be continued). According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  (5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), when the adjustment operation is performed, the demonstration display is kept visible (see, for example, FIG. 43B), but the menu display operation The demonstration display may be erased when the operation is performed. According to such a configuration, a demonstration display can be suitably performed.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), determining means (game controlling microcomputer) for determining whether to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player And a display means (for example, effect control process processing of the CPU 101 for effect control) that displays the change of the identification information and derives and displays the change display result in accordance with the determination result of the determination means. ) And specific effect execution means (for example, processing of the effect control CPU 101 for executing the change effect character display process) capable of displaying a specific effect image during execution of the variable display of the identification information. The effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position at least in front of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 19B), and the specific image In the period in which the variation display result of the identification information is derived, the output execution means sets the display mode of the specific effect image to a static mode at a position overlapping the front side of the identification information (for example, the CPU 101 for effect control) However, you may make it the process etc. which make the display mode of a specific effect image the stationary mode in the position which overlaps ahead rather than an effect design. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the display result.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 32 to 41, when the zone notice effect is executed by the effect display device 9, the zone BGM effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 32, FIG. 33 (G), FIG. 34, FIG. 35 (E), FIG. 36, FIG. 37 (E), etc., special super reach is being executed while the zone BGM effect is being executed. Sometimes, when the effect accessory 60 does not tilt, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect.

  On the other hand, when the special effect 60 is tilted while the zone BGM effect is being executed and the effect 60 is tilted, FIG. 32, FIG. 33 (H) (I) 34, FIG. 35 (E) (F), FIG. 36, FIG. 37 (E) (F), etc., the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect. In addition, when the stage effect 60 performs a tilting action, the expectation that the big hit gaming state is controlled is higher than when the stage function 60 does not tilt. For this reason, when a tilting action of the performance object 60 that increases the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state occurs, the super BGM production that increases the expectation of the big hit is executed. Emphasize that the situation is higher, and improve interest.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 32 and 38 to 41, the first zone notice effect is executed when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 (when it passes through the first start winning opening). The For this reason, according to the passage of the game ball to the first start winning opening 13, it is possible to generate a situation in which the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state is high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a high expectation level controlled to the big hit gaming state for a long time, and to improve the interest.

  (3) As the zone notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 38 to 41, the first zone notice effect that is executed from before the target change to during the target change is provided. When the zone notice effect is executed, the expectation level for controlling the big hit gaming state is high. Therefore, the first zone notice effect is executed from before the target change to during the target change. The controlled feeling of expectation can be maintained for a long time. Also, in the first zone notice effect, the zone notice effect during shutter closing is executed before the target change, and after the target change is started, the zone notice effect after the invention shutter is opened is executed. For this reason, although the zone notice effect is executed for a long time, since the effect contents can be diversified, the player's tiredness can be suppressed and the interest can be improved.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 32 and FIGS. 38 to 41, the zone notice effect can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations, as in the first zone notice effect, or the second zone notice effect and the third Like a zone notice effect, it can be executed with a single change. For this reason, even when the first zone notice effect does not start before the target change, the zone notice effect may be executed due to the target change, so that the expectation for the execution of the zone notice effect can be maintained for a long time. Further, in the second zone notice effect and the third zone notice effect, the zone notice effect during the shutter closing and the zone notice effect after the shutter is released are continuously performed with a target fluctuation of 1. For this reason, diversification of production can be achieved.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 19B, the zone effect display layer on which the shutter image displayed in the zone notice effect is displayed is the second from the smallest side among the Z values assigned to the plurality of layers. “1” (second display priority). For this reason, an image displayed in a display area other than the small symbol display area in which a Z value having a higher display priority is set becomes difficult or invisible to the player when the shutter image is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the shutter image. Further, the background or character displayed in the reach effect is executed in a display layer having a larger Z value (lower display priority) than the zone effect display layer. For this reason, when the shutter image is displayed, it is difficult or impossible for the player to visually recognize whatever reach effect is being executed, so the shutter image is displayed even if the normal effect is performed. Will remain. Therefore, even if other effects are performed as usual while the shutter closing zone notice effect is being executed, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced or eliminated.

  (6) As shown in FIGS. 18B, 33E, etc., in the zone notice effect, the special background image 300T is displayed on the effect display device 9 in the zone notice effect after the shutter is released. As shown in FIG. 33G, the special background image 300T is displayed on the effect display device 9 even after the zone notice effect (zone notice effect after the shutter is released) is finished and developed after the transition to the super reach effect. Is done. For this reason, while the super reach effect is being executed, it can be recognized that the super reach effect has undergone the zone notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state is high.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 41, the effect accessory 60 shown in FIG. 1 may perform two tilting operations. Here, when the effector 60 performs a tilting operation during the zone notice effect after the shutter release before the development to the super reach effect, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect, and after the development to the super reach effect. When the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect. As described above, even when the tilting operation of the effect accessory 60 is performed, the BGM effect is switched or not switched depending on the situation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit gaming state by the tilting operation of the effect accessory 60. Therefore, since the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the situation in which the effect effect is executed is executed, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in expectation while increasing the execution frequency of the effect effect.

  (8) As shown in FIGS. 32 to 41, when the zone notice effect is executed by the effect display device 9, the zone BGM effect is executed. If the effect accessory 60 does not tilt when the special super reach (special lower super reach) effect after the zone notice effect is ended, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect. On the other hand, if the effector 60 tilts while the special super reach (special lower super reach) effect is being executed, the special lower super reach effect is shifted to the special upper super reach effect, and the BGM is in the zone BGM. Switches to Super BGM.

  When the stage effect 60 performs a tilting motion, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the tilting motion is not performed. Further, when the effect accessory 60 performs a tilting operation while the special super reach effect is being executed, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM to the super BGM. For this reason, the stage effect 60 performs a tilting operation, and the BGM effect is switched, so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is high. Therefore, it can be emphasized that the expectation controlled to the advantageous state is high due to the change in the BGM effect.

  (9) As shown in FIGS. 16 (B1) to (B3) and the like, in response to execution of the prefetching effect as the specific effect, the common mode prefetching notification is executed regardless of the type of the prefetching effect. Thus, it becomes easier for the player to recognize whether or not the pre-reading effect is being performed, and the recognizability of a plurality of types of pre-reading effects can be improved.

  (10) In addition to executing the pre-reading notification in the common mode regardless of the type of the pre-reading effect, in addition, any effect pattern of the plurality of chance eye notice effect patterns is obtained by S634 in FIG. A common look-ahead when it is executed, when any of the multiple background change notice effect patterns is executed, or when any of the multiple pending change notice effect patterns is executed By performing the medium notification, it is possible to improve the recognizability regarding the pre-reading effects of a plurality of types of effects, and it is possible to further improve the recognizability of the pre-reading effects.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 25 (D2), for the pre-reading notification, pre-reading when the pre-reading effect is executed by ending the pre-reading notification after completion instead of at the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target. The player can not easily identify which variation display is the variation display of the determination target, and the variation display of the pre-read determination target is not easily identified by the player, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game. it can.

  (12) As for the pre-reading notification, in addition to ending the pre-reading notification after the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target, in addition to ending the pre-reading notification, a plurality of chance eye notice effect pattern patterns are displayed in S634 of FIG. When any of the production patterns is executed, any of the plurality of background change announcement production patterns is executed, and any of the plurality of pending change announcement production patterns is executed. In this case, by performing the common pre-reading notification, it is possible to improve the recognizability about the prefetch effects of a plurality of types of effects, and to further improve the recognizability of the prefetch effects.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 25 (D1), when a plurality of types of pre-reading effects are executed in response to one variation display, at the start of the pre-reading effects by the background notice effect that is first executed, Since the execution of the pre-reading notification is started, the execution time of the pre-reading notification when a plurality of specific effects are executed can be set to an appropriate time.

  (14) When a specific effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuation displays as shown in FIGS. 25 (B1) and (C1), a pre-reading notification is made over a plurality of fluctuation displays as shown in (D1). Can be executed, notification during pre-reading can be executed corresponding to the execution time of the pre-reading effect, and the recognizability of the pre-reading effect can be further improved.

  (15) As shown in FIG. 25 (D3), regarding the pre-reading notification, when there are a plurality of prefetch determination targets, the next second prefetch determination target variation display from the end of the variation display of the prefetch determination target. Since the notification is executed in a manner that continues during the period until the start of the pre-reading, the pre-reading notice effect is continuously executed until the next pre-reading determination target variation display even after the previous pre-reading determination target variation display ends. It is possible to give the player an impression as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game between the variable display of a plurality of prefetch determination targets.

  (16) In S634, when any type of prefetching effect is executed, a common prefetching notification that displays the common prefetching notification image 94 shown in FIG. A production pattern is set. Thereby, the control process when performing the pre-reading notification can be simplified.

  (17) In S634, the pre-reading notification for displaying the common pre-reading notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 is executed regardless of the type of the prefetching effect when any type of prefetching effect is executed. A production pattern is set. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pre-reading notification is being executed by the player based on the presence or absence of the display of the predetermined effect, so that the recognizability of the multiple types of pre-read effects can be further improved. it can.

  (18) As shown in the second embodiment, the adjustment result image R is displayed in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. 44B to 44D until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed. The adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, the adjustment result image R is erased (corresponding to SA712) as shown in FIG. 44 (E) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the fluctuation display result that is derived and displayed.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above embodiment, as the zone notice effect as the specific effect, the pattern in which the shutter closing zone notice effect is executed before the target change is only one pattern of the first zone notice effect. A plurality of patterns more than the pattern may be set. In addition, there are two patterns in which the zone notice effect during shutter closing and the zone notice effect after shutter release are executed during one change, the second zone notice effect and the third zone notice effect, but one pattern is set. Alternatively, three or more patterns may be set. Alternatively, this pattern may not be set.

  (2) The first zone notice effect is started when the game ball wins at the first start winning opening, but changes at other timings, for example, when the game ball wins at the first start winning opening. You may make it start zone announcement production at the start of the next change or the next change, the change following the change when a game ball won at the 1st start winning opening, or the middle of the next change You may make it start from.

  (3) The second zone notice effect and the third zone notice effect are effects that are executed only by target fluctuation, but the presence or absence of execution is determined by the prefetch effect. In contrast, a specific effect (such as a zone notice effect) or an effect corresponding to the specific effect that is executed only by target variation may be determined when determining the effect in the variation.

(4)
As shown in S711 and S712 of FIG. 26, the prefetch effect including the zone notice effect has a first hold memory in which the prefetch effect is undetermined, and the number of first hold memories in which the prefetch effect execution is not set is 2. Execution is possible on condition that the above is true. On the other hand, in the zone notice effect, it is determined whether or not there is a first reserved memory for performing the super reach effect, and when there is no first reserved memory for performing the super reach effect, the zone notice effect can be executed. You may do it. Further, pre-reading effects other than the zone notice effect may be executed when there is no first reserved memory for performing the super reach effect. Further, the prefetch determination is performed only for the first reserved memory, but the prefetch determination for the second reserved memory may be performed, or the prefetch determination may be performed for both the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory. .

  (5) The predetermined effect executed during the zone notice effect is a BGM effect, but may be another effect. For example, other sounds such as voices generated by characters other than BGM may be used, or a predetermined image display may be used. For example, the effect accessory 60 may be actuated. In the case of actuating the effect object 60, a tilting operation may be performed, or another operation may be performed. Further, the effect accessory 60 may be an accessory in another form, and may operate in a plurality of stages such as two stages and three stages. Alternatively, a lamp effect using a lamp may be used, or the handle 5 (see FIG. 1) may be vibrated, or the air discharge hole may be formed as the handle 5 or the glass door frame 2 to discharge air from the air discharge hole. Or you may. Moreover, it is good also considering the effect which combined these effects as a predetermined effect.

(6)
In the reach production, the normal reach production and the super reach production are set, but more reach production may be set. Further, a plurality of types of reach effects may be set for one or both of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. Moreover, it is good also as only one kind of reach production. Further, the reach effect may be executed in a mode other than displaying on the effect display device 9. For example, the reach effect may be executed by actuating the effect accessory 60, or the reach effect may be executed by voice, vibration, air, or the like. Further, a dot display or a drum display may be provided, and a reach effect may be performed using these dot display or drum display.

  (7) The zone announcement effect, the reach effect, and the BGM effect are executed according to the contents determined by the effect control CPU 101. However, for example, the effect contents differ depending on whether or not the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is operated. It may be. Further, when the contents of the presentation differ depending on whether or not the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is operated, a promotion notification that promotes the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 may be performed to the player. For the promotion notification, a push button 120 or a stick controller 122 like the image shown in FIG. 43 (D) may be displayed on the effect display device 9 to display characters that prompt an operation such as “Press!” An operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 may be prompted.

  (8) There are three types of BGM: normal BGM, zone BGM, and super BGM, but more types of BGM may be set. Here, for example, when developing from normal reach to super reach, the BGM for normal reach may be developed to BGM for super reach. In this case, when the BGM for normal reach and the BGM for super reach are set, the BGM for super reach is further set, and when the effector 60 tilts during super reach, the BGM for super reach is set. From the above, BGM for super super reach may be used. Or, when setting normal BGM, zone BGM, normal reach BGM and super reach BGM, when switching from normal reach to super reach, switching from normal reach BGM to super reach BGM, and zone If there is a tilting action of the effect accessory 60 when the BGM is being executed, there may be a case where the BGM for super reach is switched. The timing for switching from the normal BGM to the zone BGM may be another timing. For example, when the zone notice effect is executed, the BGM is switched from the normal BGM to the zone BGM, and the zone BGM effect is executed while the shutter closing zone notice effect is being executed. Is executed, the normal BGM effect is continuously executed, the image for releasing the shutter image is displayed, and after the transition to the notice effect after the shutter is released, the BGM is switched from the normal BGM to the zone BGM. May be.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 19B, the zone effect display layer for displaying the shutter image is the display layer having the second highest priority among the display layers shown in FIG. 19B. Other priority display layers may be used. Specifically, the layout may be a display layer having the highest priority, or the layout may be a display layer having a third or lower priority. When the zone effect display layer is not arranged at the position where the display layer having the highest priority is arranged, the error image display layer for displaying the error image shown in FIGS. 43 (D1) and (D2) has the highest priority. You may arrange so that it may become. 43A may be displayed on a display layer having a higher priority than the zone effect display layer in which the zone notice effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the small symbol image 300A is displayed at a position in front of the shutter image 300S during the shutter closing zone notice effect, but is displayed at a time other than the shutter closing zone notice effect. For example, it may be displayed constantly, or when the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are displayed in a variable manner, they are displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed only at times other than super reach. Further, the hold image H is displayed in the small symbol display area, but may be displayed in another display area, for example, a change effect display layer shown in FIG. In this case, when the shutter image 300S is displayed, the hold image H may be hidden by the shutter image 300S. Therefore, when the hold image H is hidden by the shutter image 300S, an auxiliary hold image that auxiliaryly displays the hold number corresponding to the hold image H may be displayed in the small symbol display area.

  (10) An example of displaying the above-described pre-reading notification by displaying characters is not limited to the telop display mode, and a specific character image is displayed, and the character “pre-reading” is displayed as a line of the character image. You may do it. A display area for displaying various messages such as game information or the like may be provided in a part of the effect display device 9, and the characters “Pre-reading” may be displayed in the message display area.

  (11) As the image of the pre-read notification, the image provided separately from the image of the pre-read effect such as the image of the chance eye notice effect, the image of the background change notice effect, and the image of the hold change notice effect is displayed. An example was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notification image is included in each pre-reading effect image, and is displayed as a part of the pre-reading effect image when displaying each pre-reading effect image. Also good.

  (12) As the above-described pre-reading notification image, an example in which the pre-reading notification effect mode is a completely common mode for a plurality of types of pre-reading effects is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a pre-reading notification image, a plurality of types of images having different character colors and images having different character sizes, such as images having different character sizes, are provided and selectable. Corresponding to the type of effect, it may be possible to display an image of a common aspect partially different.

  (13) As the above-described pre-reading notification, an example is shown in which the pre-reading notification in the common mode is executed for all pre-reading effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for a specific pre-reading effect that is determined in advance (for example, an effect that can be clearly recognized from the content of the effect as a pre-reading effect, etc.) You may make it perform inside alerting | reporting.

  (14) When the above-described pre-reading notification is terminated, an example has been shown in which the pre-reading notification is ended during the first variation display of the prefetch determination target. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notification may be terminated during the subsequent variation display of the prefetch determination target.

  (15) When the pre-reading notification is terminated, an example of ending the pre-reading notification in the first variation display of the prefetch determination target indicates that a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display. It was. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of terminating the pre-reading notification in the first variation display of the prefetch determination target, the timing at which the first symbol stops or the reach state occurs in the variation display. The pre-reading notification may be terminated at a predetermined effect execution timing in the variation pattern of the variation display, such as (timing when two symbols stop).

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which an effect that always performs a pre-reading notification in a common mode is shown when various prefetch effects are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is decided to execute various types of pre-reading effects, it is determined whether to execute the pre-reading notification in the common mode at a selection rate set to a predetermined rate of less than 100%. However, the pre-reading notification in the common mode may be executed only when the execution of the pre-reading notification is selected.

  (17) Please disclose that the color of the corner of the display surface of the effect display device 9 may be changed depending on the image such as the effect image as the effect of the pre-reading notification shown in the above embodiment. . Further, an effect of causing a specific lamp (light emitting means) provided on the game board or the game frame to emit light may be executed (the lamp may be dedicated for pre-reading notification or other effects) And may also be used in combination).

  (18) The end timing of the pre-read notification shown in the above-described embodiment is not limited to that described above, but before the change display of the pre-read determination target (for example, the first change display of the pre-read determination target). Other timings, such as when the display of fluctuation of the pre-reading determination target is started, when the display of fluctuation of the pre-reading determination target is being started, during the display of the fluctuation of the pre-reading determination target (for example, when reach is established), May be used.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (D2), with regard to the pre-reading notification, an effect of ending the pre-reading notification after completion rather than at the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a function, as a pre-reading notification, a notification in a different production mode may be made without reporting a common mode in a plurality of types of pre-reading productions. For example, when the degree of expectation for the big hit is the same depending on the type of the pre-reading effect, predetermined notifications of different effect modes may be executed according to the type of the pre-reading effect. In addition, when the degree of expectation for the big hit differs depending on the type of the prefetch effect, predetermined notifications of different effects may be executed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit corresponding to each prefetch effect.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the pre-reading effect is not executed when the number of reserved memories is not two or more is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect may be executed even when the number of reserved memories is not two or more.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the selection decision to execute the prefetch effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and such a selection decision is made on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and data capable of specifying the decision result is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 by the effect control command, and the effect control microcomputer is sent. The computer 100 may perform it according to the effect control command.

  (22) In the embodiment described above, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state. The advantageous state is a state in which one kind or two or more kinds are combined from each state of other advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state (probability variation state), a short-time state, and a high base state. Also good.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, Although an example of transmitting the variation pattern command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called second if not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode is transmitted before the stop, and the second command is the so-called second stop after reaching the reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the redrawing effect (if the reach is not reach) A command indicating the variation time and variation mode of (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the change pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands in this way, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, the prefetch determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command.

  (24) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (25) As the present embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described, but the game media is enclosed and the game media is You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (26) In the embodiment described above, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, as the “ratio (ratio, probability)”, a predetermined value exceeding 0% has been described as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when the display result of the variation display is determined to be the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability variation state is unconditionally entered. An example of controlled probability state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 20. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (29) It should be noted that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structures shown to embodiment mentioned above, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned form example and modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can execute a specific effect (for example, a zone notice effect, etc.) that suggests a transition to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player over a plurality of variations. Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 101) and predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of different predetermined effects (for example, BGM effects such as normal BGM effects, zone BGM effects, super BGM effects, etc.) (For example, a production control CPU 101) and a notification effect execution means (for example, a production) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) as to whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state. Control means (for example, control CPU 101) and control means (for example, control based on the received command (for example, production control command)) An effect control microcomputer 90100), a first storage area (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) in which a received command is first stored, and a second storage area (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115). A transfer buffer provided in the internal RAM 90112) and a third storage area (for example, an analysis buffer provided in the external SDRAM 90116) in which the received command is finally stored. First storage control means (for example, a command for reading out a command stored in the first storage area and storing it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt (e.g., a serial reception interrupt) generated each time Steps S90721 to S90723 in the production control microcomputer 90100 A second storage control means for reading out a command stored in the second storage area and storing it in the third storage area based on a timer interrupt generated every predetermined period (for example, 1 ms). For example, the part for executing steps S90741 to S90748 in the effect control microcomputer 90100 and the analysis means for analyzing the command stored in the third storage area (for example, step S90704 in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is executed). The predetermined effect executing means starts executing a predetermined effect of a type corresponding to the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect (for example, when the zone notice effect is executed) End of notification effect executed after specific effect (for example, zone notice) The execution of a predetermined effect corresponding to a specific effect (for example, a zone BGM effect corresponding to a zone notice effect, etc.) is ended (for example, an end of a super reach effect that is executed after the effect is executed, for example) The zone BGM effect is ended in response to the end of the super reach effect that is executed after the zone notice effect is executed, etc.) The first pattern and a predetermined type corresponding to the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect Special that suggests a transition to an advantageous state during the execution of the production and during the execution of the notification production executed after the specific production (for example, during the execution of the super reach production executed after the zone notice production) The type of the predetermined effect is changed (for example, output from the speaker 27) in response to the execution of the effect (for example, the effect effect in which the effect object 60 tilts). The gaming machine and the like, characterized in that the switch the BGM effect from the zone BGM effect super BGM effect) is capable of executing a second pattern.

  According to the above gaming machine, it can be emphasized that the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is higher, and the interest can be improved. In addition, when a large number of commands are received, it is possible to reduce missed commands.

  In the gaming machine, the specific effect, the predetermined effect, and the notification effect may be controlled based on the command received by the control means. According to this, since the command means is reduced in the control means, the specific effect, the predetermined effect, and the notification effect can be controlled based on more accurate information. Therefore, the reliability of the specific effect, the predetermined effect, and the notification effect is enhanced, and the interest of the effect can be further enhanced.

  When at least a part of the command is missed, execution of the specific effect, the predetermined effect, and the notification effect may be restricted. As a restriction, the effect may not be executed, the execution rate of the effect may be reduced, or the effect may be executed only in a mode with low expectation. In addition, it may be possible to execute the effect in a dedicated manner capable of recognizing that the command has been missed. According to this, it can suppress that the reliability of an effect falls and an interest falls because an effect is performed by information with low reliability.

  Further, as an example of a gaming machine that can reduce missed commands when a large number of commands are received, the gaming machine is capable of playing a game, and the received command (for example, an effect control command) Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90100) that performs control based on the first storage area (for example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) in which the received command is first stored, and the received command Is temporarily stored (for example, a transfer buffer provided in the internal RAM 90112) and a third storage area (for example, an analysis buffer provided in the external SDRAM 90116) in which the received command is finally stored. ), And the control means receives a reception percentage generated each time a command is received. First storage control means (for example, step S90721 in the production control microcomputer 90100) that reads out the command stored in the first storage area and stores it in the second storage area based on (for example, serial reception interrupt). The second storage control for reading out the command stored in the second storage area and storing it in the third storage area based on the timer interrupt generated every predetermined period (for example, 1 ms) Means (for example, a part for executing steps S90741 to S90748 in the production control microcomputer 90100) and analysis means for analyzing the command stored in the third storage area (for example, step S90704 in the production control microcomputer 90100) Part to be executed) The gaming machine and the like to be a butterfly. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 906).

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 902. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903, an extra ball receiving tray 904 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 that emits hitting balls are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 907 is formed on the front surface of the game board 906 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 909 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 908a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 908b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. .

  Further, in the effect display device 909, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continuously provided for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is in a state of being in agreement with the combination of symbols), stopped, swinging, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or multiple symbols may fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol may be switched. Thus, an effect performed in a state in which the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol which will be described later, A fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 909, for example, the effect contents including the effect symbol change display disappear from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 909 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the current variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 909c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red, and the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the outlier) For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. The display color may remain different depending on which of the jackpots.) The display color when the 4th symbol display areas 909c and 909d are turned off is the background when the lights are turned off. In order to prevent the image from being assimilated and disappearing, it is desirable that the display color be different from the background image (for example, black).

  In this embodiment, a case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 909. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Also, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 906, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 906, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 908b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has a first start winning opening 9013 or a second start winning opening) After passing 9014 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 9013 is provided below the effect display device 909. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the first start opening switch 9013a.

  A variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning port 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 9013. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 9014 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the second start opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 9014 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, it is easier for a game ball to win the second start winning port 9014 than the first starting winning port 9013. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 9014. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 9013 than the second starting winning port 9014. Note that in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning port 9013 and the second start winning port 9014 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 9015 is very likely to win the second start winning port 9014. The first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 909 and the first start winning port 9013 is further reduced, or the first start winning port is opened. The nail arrangement around 9013, or the nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 9013 makes it difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning rate of the second start winning opening 9014 You may make it make higher than the winning rate of the 1st start winning opening 9013.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, a variable winning ball device 9015 that opens and closes only with respect to the second start winning opening 9014 is provided. Any of the start winning openings 9014 may be provided with a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 9018a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory display 9018a increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered into the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserved storage number. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a first reserved memory display unit 909a for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 909b for displaying the second reserved memory number are provided. ing. The first hold storage display unit 909a displays a first hold display corresponding to each of the first hold storage. The second hold storage display unit 909b displays a second hold display corresponding to each second hold storage. In this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are individually displayed is shown. However, the sum is the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays a pending | holding memory number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. In addition, in such a configuration, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 in the combined hold storage display unit. So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  The effect display device 909 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is synchronized with the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect display device 909 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 for controlling the variation display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command that can specify the variation time, and is received by the effect control microcomputer 90100. The variation display of the effect symbols is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, a movable member 9078 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 9086 and moves when the motor 9086 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 9078 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) or a super reach effect is executed. Note that the movable member 9078 may operate in a pseudo-continuous production, for example, in addition to the movable object notice production and the super reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 45, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 9021 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 9023.

  The game area 906 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 for paying out a predetermined number of prize game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls that have won the winning ports 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 are detected by the winning port switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a.

  A normal symbol display 9010 is provided on the right side of the game board 906. The normal symbol display 9010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “X”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 9014). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 9032, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol storage memory display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Every time variable display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (the state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of the special symbol is increased compared to the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

  Decorative LEDs 9025 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 into which a hit ball that has not been won is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 9027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 907. On the outer periphery of the game area 907, a frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hit ball supply tray 903 are provided with operation buttons 90120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 90120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. Note that the operation button 90120 is not only provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also provided with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 907. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 908a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 9013. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display device 908b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probable big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probable state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, a special symbol). The display shifts to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the variable display execution condition in the displays 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened or the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is increased compared to the case where the high base state is not set. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display 9010 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to start a prize). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time-short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is in the open state is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the transition is made to the high base state, the transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the short time state in this way, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is reduced). It is possible to reduce the situation that an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. 46 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 9056 and the RAM 9055, and the ROM 9054 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 9053 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit). The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a serial communication circuit 9051.

  The RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 90910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

  The random number circuit 9053 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 9053 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 9053 has a numeric data update range selection / setting function (initial value selection / setting function and upper limit selection / setting function), numeric data update rule selection / setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 9054 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560). The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 9053 can be further improved.

  The serial communication circuit 9051 has a function of converting an effect control command into a serial signal and transmitting it to an effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080 by a serial communication method.

  Further, an input driver circuit 9058 for providing the game control microcomputer 90560 with detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the start port switch 9013a, the count switch 9023, and the winning port switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a is also mounted on the main board 9031. Yes. Also, an output circuit 9059 for driving a solenoid 9016 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and a solenoid 9021 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 for forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also provided. 9031.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 9010 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control is performed on the display 9018a, the second special symbol storage memory display 9018b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 9041.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 directs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 by the serial communication method. The control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 909 that variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 performs display control of the decoration LED 9025 provided on the game board and the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 9035. The sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the sound output board 9070.

  FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 47, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90100 including an effect control CPU 90101 and an internal RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM, and receives the effect control command using the serial communication circuit (see FIG. 66). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command. The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an external SDRAM 90116. The built-in ROM and built-in RAM of the production control microcomputer 90100 and the external SDRAM 90116 will be described later.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 90109 that controls display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. The VDP 90109 then outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM for this purpose. The VDP 90109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 90101. The VDP 90109 performs display control based on the read image data.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the motor 9086 to operate the movable member 9078 via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9087 for operating the effect blades 9079a and 9079b via the output port 90106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs a signal from the operation button 90120 via the input port 90107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 90120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. The effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

  In the lamp driver board 9035, a signal for driving the LED and the lamp is input to the LED driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED driver 90352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 9028 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 9025 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs the voice or sound effect to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706, to the speaker 9027. The audio data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, a changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S904), the RAM is accessible (Step S905). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S906). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing in steps S9041 and S9042, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  In addition, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 9080 (step S90). S9044). Then, control goes to a step S9014. In step S9044, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 52). You may make it do. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the saved variable time timer value is resumed, and the special symbol fluctuation display is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value to be described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Instead of always sending the display result designation command when the power failure is restored, the CPU 9056 may first check whether the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state is not in a state, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

  By the processing in steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a normal symbol per-determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total winning ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 9056 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed initialization processing). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 causes the effect display device 909 to display a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 9053 (step S9014). For example, the CPU 9056 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 9053 to update the value of the random R ′.

  In step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Setting is performed (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine. In the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, or the game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 90100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S9021). ).

  Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the normal symbol display 9010, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating a random number for determination such as a random number for determination per normal symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

  Furthermore, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S9027, based on the detection of the passing of the game ball to the gate 9032, the normal symbol variation display is executed and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: step S9028).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro that is mounted on the payout control board 9037 in response to winning detection based on one of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S9031: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S9032).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 9056 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol variation rate every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display device 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  If the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909 are shifted and stopped, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the effect symbol variable display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normally shift”) in the case where the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the first special symbol indicator 908a or the second special symbol indicator 908b and the effect display device 909 are shifted and stopped, the effect symbol variable display state is changed after the effect symbol variable display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that will not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Eventually, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 909L, 909C, and 909R on the effect display device 909 (however, suddenly probable big hit) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 909. In the same way as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 909 corresponding to the stoppage display of “5” as the small hit symbol on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the gaming machine is configured such that the big hit types are all probable big hits, the small hits may not be provided. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you make a small hit, it is just a transition to a probable change state (high probability state) and a sudden probable big hit without a short time state (high base state). Is preferably provided.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 ′ (MR1 ′): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 ′ (MR2 ′): Determines the type (type) of the variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 ′ (MR3 ′): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 ′ (MR4 ′): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol)
(5) Random 5 ′ (MR5 ′): The initial value of random 4 ′ is determined (for determining the random 4 ′ initial value).

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′) and then determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′). One of the variation patterns included in the selected variation pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into variation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects.

  In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 49, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number for determination of normal symbol of (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2 ′, random 3 ′) or initial value random numbers (random 5 ′). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 90560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 90560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 51A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 51 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 51 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 51A is a jackpot determination value.

  51B and 51C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R ′ is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 51B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is set in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 51B and 51C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is transitioned to the probable state, a small hit is generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not it will be probable, the current game state is in the probable state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if the second special symbol is displayed so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display, if the gaming state is in a probable state, the small hit is unlikely to occur, and the roaring effect for the probable change is not performed more than necessary. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 9053 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (ordinary jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (C), it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 51A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. In addition, determining whether or not to win the jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first winning symbol 9013 is started to win and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second winning symbol 9014 is started to win and the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 51D and 51E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. Of these, FIG. 51D determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a. FIG. 51 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Is a big hit type determination table (for second special symbol) 90131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b indicate that when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot” based on the random number (random 1 ′) for determining the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51D and 51E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 90131a (40 minutes). 8 is determined to be a sudden probability variation big hit), whereas the jackpot type determination table 90131b is assigned two determination values for "sudden probability variation big hit" (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first winning symbol 9013 is won and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second winning symbol 9014 is started and won and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “suddenly probable big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 90131a, and “suddenly probable big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 90131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 (D) and (E), a sudden probability variation big hit (two round big hit) as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, and the game There are cases where it is determined to be a normal jackpot and a probable bonus jackpot (15 round jackpot) as the second specific gaming state that gives a game value larger than the value, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed However, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51D and 51E, the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 7-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types: “normal jackpot”, “probability big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. However, the number is not limited to three, for example, four or more types. A big hit type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the short-time state (high base state) after the big hit gaming state ends (see steps S90167 and 90168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, when the variable display is ended 100 times, the time reduction state ends (see steps S90168 and S90137 to 90140 described later). In this embodiment, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the end of the execution of 100 fluctuation displays (see step S90132 described later).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state and is shifted to a probable change state (high probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the jackpot is changed to the probable change state) The state is also shifted to the short time state (high base state) (see steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” means that the number of times of opening the big prize opening is smaller than in “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is allowed twice). Is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability variation big hit gaming state is finished, the state is shifted to the probability variation state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the state is shifted to the probability variation state and the time reduction state (high base state) is changed. (See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the fun of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 90131a and 90131b are numerical values to be compared with random 1 'values, and the determination values corresponding to the "normal big hit", "probable change big hit", and "suddenly probable big hit" (big hit type determination) Value) is set. When the value of random 1 ′ matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIG. 52 and FIG. 53 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the example shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H).

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 ends the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command is used. Specifically, in the case of “ordinary big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of “normal big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is used. In the case of “sudden probability change big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special winning opening that designates round 10 (A10A (H)). A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “normal big hit” is ended. Command A 302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by the “probable big hit”. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to send an ending designation command for sudden probability variation big hit end designation when sudden probability variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command when small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time-short state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the hold memory information, an effect control command (first hold memory number addition designation indicating that the hold memory number has increased or decreased for the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively). Command, the second reserved memory count addition designation command) is transmitted, but the format of the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, but, for example, the reserved memory in the following mode Information may be transmitted.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and in the one command, which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is specified is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is increased (The first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in the one command, which of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is increased is specified, and the total number of the hold storage is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Designate which one of the first start winning port 9013 and the second start winning port 9014 has won the start-up as the hold memory information (which one of the first hold memory and the second hold memory has increased) In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data for transmission.

(4) Designating which of the first start winning port 9013 and the second start winning port 9014 the start winning prize (which of the first holding memory and the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the holding memory information In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The increased reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small win or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range is included in the variation pattern type determination random number among the winning determination results. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, a big hit type, and a variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. It is determined in which determination value range the random number value is used. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the image display device 909 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 9070. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 designates a variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As a method for sending the effect control command, the game control microcomputer 90560 converts the 2-byte effect control command into a serial signal using a serial communication circuit (not shown) mounted on the game control microcomputer 90560. In addition, a serial communication method is used in which presentation control command data is output from the main board 9031 to the presentation control board 9080 using a single serial signal line.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the design symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 908b, and that produces an effect in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the production components such as the device 909, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 to the production control microcomputer 90100 can be prevented from increasing.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, if the first start port switch 9013a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 9013 is turned on, that is, the start to the first start winning port 9013 is performed. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passing process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). If the second start port switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 9014 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 9014 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a is not turned on, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

  Processing in steps S90300 to S90310 is as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the microcomputer for game control 90560 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage) is confirmed. The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S90303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 90100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. The effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S90304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process as described later. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 65), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S9022.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S90305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control for transmitting a special winning opening opening designation command to the production control microcomputer 90100 is performed, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S90306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a command for opening a special winning opening that designates round 10 (A10A (H)).

  Large winning opening open process (step S90306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S90307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 90100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to step S90300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S90308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S90309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of times of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

  Small hit end process (step S90310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to step S90300.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in steps S90312 and S90314. Among these, FIG. 56 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S90312. FIG. 56B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S90314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 9013a is in the on state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S90111A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S901212A) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S901213A). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 57) (step S901214A). . Note that in the process of step S901214A, a random R ′ that is a hardware random number (random hit determination random number), a big hit type determination random number that is a software random number (random 1 ′), and a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2 ′). Then, the random number for random pattern determination (random 3 ′) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3 ′) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize), but extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may make it do. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′) in a variation pattern setting process described later. .

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 57, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R ′ that is a hardware random number (random hit determination random number) and a big hit type determination random number that is a software random number (random 1 ′). The random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2 ′) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3 ′) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown where random numbers such as jackpot determination random numbers are stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer as reserved storage, but the predetermined information stored as the reserved storage is It is not limited to random values. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is a time reduction state (high base state) is set (step S901215A). If set, the process proceeds to step S90120A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S901216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state), the CPU 9056 directly proceeds to step S901220A.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize presentation effect process is executed in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the start prize (step) S901217A). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S901218A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219A). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220A).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S901218A and S901219A, the CPU 9056 always designates the symbol every time the first start winning opening 9013 is won and the effect processing at the time of winning in step S901217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218A to S901220A is executed, a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 occurs, and the designating process at the time of winning in step S901217A is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect process in step S901217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S901215A or step S901216A, the CPU 9056 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S901220A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. In addition, when the winning effect processing in step S901217A is not executed, a winning determination result designation in which a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is set as EXT data is designated. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S901215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013, only when the gaming state is the low base state, the process of step S901217A is performed. Winning effect processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S901216A is executed, and there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 9013, only when the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is not set, step S901217A is executed. The award winning directing process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S901217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to step S901217A to execute the effect process at the time of winning when in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after it is notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is informed that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the jackpot is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S90305) to the big hit end processing (see step S90307) in the special symbol process is being executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved port switch 9014a is turned on). Whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the stored number is 4 is confirmed (step S90111B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S90112B), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S901213B). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 57) (step S901214B). . Note that in the processing of step S901214B, random R ′ (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1 ′) that is a software random number, and random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2 ′). Then, the random number for random pattern determination (random 3 ′) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3 ′) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize), but extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol You may make it do. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′) in a variation pattern setting process described later. .

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning effect process (step S901217B). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect process (step S901218B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219B). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220B).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S901218B and S901219B, the CPU 9056 always starts design winning at the second start winning opening 9014 and executes the winning effect processing of step S901217B. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218B to S901220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 occurs, and the designating process at the time of winning in step S901217B is executed. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command, are transmitted in one timer interrupt.

  In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S901215A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be executed. That is, only in the normal state (low base state), the winning effect processing in step S901217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S901216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be executed if the big hit game is being played. Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 9056 checks the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 9056 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S9051A, the CPU 9056 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be made so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 checks whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step S9052). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 9056 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Data indicating “second” is set in (Step S9053). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9052 to S9054, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Are stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 9056 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3 and 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S9058). Note that the CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

  In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current gaming state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 9056 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in this order. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, the display result designation command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and after 4 ms has elapsed. A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 9013, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 9014 Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S90300 to S90310 can be made common between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R ′ (big hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for jackpot determination that has been extracted in step S901214A of the first starter switch passing process and step S901214B of the second starter switch passing process and previously stored in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares a big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 51) determined in advance with a big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes processing for determining big hits and determining small hits.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probability change state (normal state). Specifically, the probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 51A in the ROM 9054 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 51A in the ROM 9054 is set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state. If the gaming state is a probable change state, the CPU 9056 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability change big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R ′) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 51A, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big-hit determination random number (random R ′) does not match any of the big-hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small-hit determination table (see FIGS. 51B and 51C). Use it to determine the small hits. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R ′) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol will be a small hit. . In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

  If the value of the random R ′ does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S9075.

  In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1 ′) stored in the random number buffer area (“normal jackpot”, “ "Probable variation big hit" or "suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the big hit type (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type that has been extracted in step S901214A of the first starter switch passing process and step S901214B of the second starter switch passing process and previously stored in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 51D and 51E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 9056 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” that is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is determined first, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9091). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects one of the big hit variation pattern type determination table as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step) S9092). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9093). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S9094). ). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S9095). In this embodiment, the time reduction flag is set when shifting to the short-time state at the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit, and at the end of the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the time-varying state is also set. Because of this, the short time flag is set. Therefore, if it is determined as Y in step S9095, control is performed in the short-time state together with the probability change state after the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, in addition to the case where the control is only in the short time state after the big hit game based on the normal big hit game. There are times when it has been.

  If the time flag is not set (N in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is a normal state, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S9096). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S9096), the CPU 9056 uses the fluctuation pattern type for deviation for normal time as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. A determination table is selected (step S9097). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  If the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9096), the CPU 9056 uses the fluctuation pattern for shortening as a table used to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types. A pattern type determination table is selected (step S9098). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used, a time-varying variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S9099). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of steps S9095 to S9099, the loss variation pattern type determination for shortening is performed. A table is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state, a loss variation pattern type determination table for time reduction is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S90100 described later. When the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation is performed in the process of step S90102. A variation pattern for shortening variation is determined as a pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, a change display of the shortened variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the short time state is different from the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage. However, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). May not display the variation display of the shortened variation. In this case, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines Y in step S9095, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. If the total pending storage number is almost zero, the CPU 9056 is out of normal use. The change pattern type determination table for use may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads the random 2 ′ (variation pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and selects it by the processing in steps S9092, S9094, S9097, S9098, or S9099. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90100).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S90100, the CPU 9056 uses a hit variation pattern determination table and a deviation variation pattern determination table as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. One of them is selected (step S90101). Further, the random 3 ′ (variation pattern determination random number) is read from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and the variation is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S90101. The pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90102). In the case where the random 3 ′ (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern determination for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3 ′). A value may be directly extracted from a random number counter, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90104).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 9055 (step S90105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S90106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S9095 to S90100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission processing, the CPU 9056 transmits any effect control command (refer to FIG. 52) of display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S90116. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S90111 and S90112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probability big hit”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S90113 and S90114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal process is “02”. . When neither the “normal big hit” nor the “probability change big hit” (that is, “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S90115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90110), the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S90117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90116), that is, in the case of a loss, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S90118).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90119).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first checks whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command (the first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S90121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted, for example, indicates whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S90112 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S901121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  If the pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S901125). When the variation time timer times out (step S901126), the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S90304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time shortening flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S90132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot”, a jackpot start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is “probable big hit”, a jackpot start 2 designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 909 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S90134). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in the case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in the case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S90135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S90305) (step S90136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S90131, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the hourly number counter that indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the hourly state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S90138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the time reduction flag (step S90140).

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 909 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S90143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S90144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S90308) (step S90145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90146).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S90160). If the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S90164. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S90161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S90162). Here, when it is “ordinary big hit”, a big hit end 1 designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is “probable big hit”, it is a big hit end 2 designation command (command A302 (H)). ) Is transmitted, and in the case of “sudden probability change big hit”, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 909 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S90163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S90164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be ended this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S90166). Whether or not the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended is specifically determined whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. This can be determined by checking. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S90166), the CPU 9056 sets the short time flag to shift the gaming state to the short time state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) to the hour / short number counter (step S90168).

  Unless it is a case where the big hit game based on the normal big hit is not finished (that is, when the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit is finished), the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to change the gaming state to the probability variation state. In addition to the transition (step S90169), the time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S90170).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90171).

  In this embodiment, since the above processing is executed, when it is controlled to the probability variation state, it is also controlled to the time reduction state, so that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / low base state) ), Short-time state (low probability / high base state), and probability variation state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol displays 908a and 908b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 9056 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal process. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b. Since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S903204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is not displayed in the display control processing of step S9022. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S903201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side, the display result designation command transmission processing also varies. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S9032), the CPU 9056 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the configuration and operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080. As shown in FIG. An effect control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 66 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and an effect control CPU 90101, a clock circuit 90110, a built-in ROM 90111, a built-in RAM 90112, a timer circuit 90113, an interrupt controller 90114, and a serial And a communication circuit 90115. Although not shown in FIG. 66, the production control microcomputer 90100 includes various circuits such as an external bus interface, a random number circuit, a reset circuit, an arithmetic circuit, a watchdog timer, an address decode circuit, and an input / output port. And interface and port.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the effect control microcomputer 90100. As shown in FIG. 67, in the area from address 0000H to address FFFFH, the area assigned to the built-in ROM of the production control microcomputer 90100, the area assigned to the built-in RAM, and the built-in register area assigned to the built-in register are allocated. The area etc. are included. As shown in FIG. 67, the area allocated to the built-in ROM includes a program code / data area (an area for storing user programs and data) and a program management area. The program management area is a storage area for storing information necessary for performing various settings such as interrupt operation setting of the production control microcomputer 90100, serial communication circuit setting, random number circuit setting, and internal reset operation setting. is there.

  The interrupt controller 90114 is a circuit that controls various interrupt requests in the effect control microcomputer 90100 such as a serial reception interrupt and a timer interrupt. The interrupt controller 90114 includes an interrupt control register for setting interrupt permission / rejection and interrupt priority for each interrupt type.

  FIG. 68A shows a configuration example of an interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting provided in the interrupt controller 90114. FIG. 68B shows an example of setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting. The internal information data Im7 stored in the bit number [7] of the interrupt control register for setting the serial reception interrupt indicates whether or not serial reception interrupt is permitted. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (B), if the bit value of the internal information data Im7 is set to “0”, the serial reception interrupt is set to the permitted state, while the bit of the internal information data Im7 is set to “1”. If this is done, the serial reception interrupt is disabled. In the example shown in FIG. 68B, it is assumed that the initial value of the internal information data Im7 is set to “1”.

  Internal information data Im3 to Im0 stored in bit numbers [3-0] of the interrupt control register for setting the serial reception interrupt indicate the priority of the serial reception interrupt. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (B), the internal information data Im3 to Im0 are set with numerical values in 16 steps from “0000 [0 (H)]” to “1111 [F (H)]”, and “0000 [0 ( H)] ”is the highest priority for serial reception interrupts, and“ 1111 [F (H)] ”is the lowest priority for serial reception interrupts.

  FIG. 69A shows a configuration example of an interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting provided in the interrupt controller 90114. FIG. 69B shows an example of the setting contents in each bit of the internal information data stored in the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting. Internal information data In7 stored in the bit number [7] of the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting indicates whether or not timer interrupt is permitted. In the example shown in FIG. 69B, if the bit value of the internal information data In7 is set to “0”, the timer interrupt is set to the permitted state, while the bit of the internal information data In7 is set to “1”. Timer interrupt is disabled. In the example shown in FIG. 69B, it is assumed that the initial value of the internal information data In7 is set to “1”.

  The internal information data In3 to In0 stored in the bit numbers [3-0] of the interrupt control register for setting the timer interrupt indicate the priority of the timer interrupt. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (B), the internal information data In3 to In0 are set by 16-stage numerical values from “0000 [0 (H)]” to “1111 [F (H)]”, and “0000 [0 ( H)] ”has the highest timer interrupt priority, and“ 1111 [F (H)] ”has the lowest timer interrupt priority.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting and timer interrupt setting is shown as an example. 68. If interrupt requests such as external interrupts, serial transmission interrupts, and interrupts by random number circuit random number capture are accepted, an interrupt control register is provided for each interrupt. These interrupt control registers are configured according to the same configuration as in FIG. Also, for example, when multiple channels of serial communication circuits are provided and each channel is configured to accept serial reception interrupts and serial transmission interrupts, serial reception interrupt setting and serial transmission are performed for each channel. An interrupt control register for interrupt setting is provided. In addition, for example, when a plurality of timer circuits are provided and configured to accept a plurality of types of timer interrupts, an interrupt control register is provided for each timer interrupt.

  The setting data set in the interrupt control register shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 is set in advance in the program management area (see FIG. 67) of the built-in ROM. The production control microcomputer 90100 performs setting of the serial communication circuit, setting of the random number circuit, setting of the internal reset operation, etc. according to the setting contents of the program management area when the game machine is turned on. In addition, by setting the setting data in the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt (see FIG. 68) and the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting (see FIG. 69) provided in the interrupt controller 90114, serial data is set. Reception interrupts and timer interrupts are also set. Note that the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes this setting operation in hardware, regardless of the program.

  In this embodiment, the internal information data Im7 of the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt shown in FIG. 68 and the internal information data register In7 of the interrupt control register for timer interrupt shown in FIG. The serial reception interrupt and the timer interrupt are set to the permitted state. In this embodiment, internal information data Im3 to Im0 of the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt shown in FIG. 68 are set to “0000 [0 (H)]” and the timer shown in FIG. The internal information data registers In3 to In0 of the interrupt control register for interrupt are set to “0001 [1 (H)]”, and the priority of the serial reception interrupt is set higher than that of the timer interrupt.

  In this embodiment, in each interrupt control register shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, “0000 [0 (H)]” and “0001 [1 (H)] are set in order from the setting value with the higher priority. However, the present invention is not limited to the setting mode shown in this embodiment. For example, “1111 [F (H)]” is set in the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting shown in FIG. 69 in order from the setting value with the lower priority, and the serial reception interrupt setting shown in FIG. By setting “1110 [E (H)]” in the interrupt control register, the serial reception interrupt may be set to have a higher priority than the timer interrupt. Also, for example, “0010 [2 (H)]” is set in the interrupt control register for serial reception interrupt setting shown in FIG. 68, and “0100” is set in the interrupt control register for timer interrupt setting shown in FIG. By setting [4 (H)], the serial reception interrupt may be set to have a higher priority than the timer interrupt, and at least the serial reception interrupt is higher than the timer interrupt. However, any setting method may be used so as to increase the priority.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reception register and each reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this embodiment, the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 is first stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 of the effect control microcomputer 90100. The reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is composed of a FIFO (first-in first-out) 16-byte area, and can store a maximum of eight 2-byte presentation control commands.

  As shown in FIG. 70, every time a serial reception interrupt occurs, the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is transferred to the transfer buffer. Therefore, as described above, the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 can store a maximum of eight presentation control commands. In this embodiment, when a presentation control command is received, a serial reception interrupt is generated immediately. Since it is transferred to the transfer buffer, there is virtually no case where two or more effect control commands are accumulated in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115. In this example, the transfer buffer is a buffer of a ring buffer type configured by 128 bytes having a capacity larger than that of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 and capable of storing 64 2-byte configuration effect control commands. As shown in FIG. 70, the transfer buffer is formed in the built-in RAM of the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  As shown in FIG. 70, every time a timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms, the effect control command stored in the transfer buffer is transferred to the analysis buffer. The analysis buffer is provided with an analysis buffer (upper) and an analysis buffer (lower), and the higher-order data (MODE data) of the effect control commands read from the transfer buffer is The data is stored in the analysis buffer (upper), and the lower data (EXT data) is stored in the analysis buffer (lower). In this embodiment, the analysis buffer (upper) and the analysis buffer (lower) are each composed of 256 bytes having a larger capacity than the transfer buffer, and can store 256 2-byte effect control commands ( Of the effect control command, the upper 1 byte (MODE data) is stored in the analysis buffer (upper), and the lower 1 byte (EXT data) is stored in the analysis buffer (lower), so 256 can be stored. It is a ring buffer type buffer. As shown in FIG. 70, the analysis buffer (upper) and the analysis buffer (lower) are formed in an SDRAM 90116 that is externally connected to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 90101 transfers the effect control command from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer (upper) and the analysis buffer (lower), an external control command is sent. While access to the SDRAM 90116 connected by the bus is required, when transferring the effect control command from the reception register to the transfer buffer, the serial communication circuit 90115 connected to the internal bus and the built-in RAM 90112 are transferred. Data access can be performed at high speed because it only needs to be accessed.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 1 ms) (step S90701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interruption occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 72). If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 909 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S90706). In the 4th symbol process, in the 4th symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909, a process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S90707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S90702.

  When a timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, the effect control CPU 90101 first executes an analysis buffer transfer process of transferring the effect control command stored in the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer (step S90711). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag (step S90712).

  In this embodiment, the analysis buffer transfer process is executed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 72, but only the timer interrupt flag is set in the timer interrupt process. The analysis buffer transfer process may be executed within the loop process of steps S90702 to S90707 of the main process shown (for example, the analysis buffer transfer process is executed between step S90703 and step S90704).

  When the effect control command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560 and a serial reception interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 transfers the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the transfer buffer. Execute transfer buffer transfer processing for transfer. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a transfer buffer transfer process executed when a serial reception interrupt occurs.

  In the transfer buffer transfer process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads the received effect control command from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 (step S90721). The effect control command is composed of 2 bytes, but the received effect control command is stored byte by byte in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115, and the higher order data (MODE data) of the effect control command is stored. Since the serial reception interrupt is generated each time when the low-order data (EXT data) is received, the effect control CPU 90101 receives the effect control received from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 in step S90721. Read command one byte at a time. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the effect control command is received upon reception of the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data). In step S90721, the effect control CPU 90101 generates a serial reception interrupt. Accordingly, the effect control command is read in the order of the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 writes the read effect control command (1-byte data) in the area indicated by the write pointer in the transfer buffer (step S90722). In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 adds 1 to the value of the write pointer in the transfer buffer (step S90723).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not the effect buffer command received by the delivery buffer is full (step S90724). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the write pointer value of the transfer buffer has caught up with the read pointer value, and has caught up (ie, an unread area). In the state where the next data is to be written), it can be determined that the transfer buffer is full. If the transfer buffer is not full, the process advances to step S90735.

  If the delivery buffer is full, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the effect control command (1-byte data) from the delivery buffer (step S90725). In this case, the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the effect control command (1-byte upper data (MODE data) or lower data (EXT data)) read in step S90725 in, for example, one of the data registers. Keep it. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 adds 1 to the value of the read pointer in the transfer buffer (step S90726).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the read data is higher-order data (MODE data) of the effect control command (step S90727). Specifically, in this embodiment, the higher order data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to a value in the range of 80 (H) to FF (H), and the lower order data (EXT data) is It is configured to always have a value in the range of 00 (H) to 7F (H) (see FIG. 52). Therefore, in step S90727, if the most significant bit of the read data is “1”, the effect control CPU 90101 can determine that the data is the higher data (MODE data), and the most significant bit of the read data is “ If it is “0”, it can be determined that the data is lower-order data (EXT data).

  If the read data is the lower data (EXT data) (N in step S90727: That is, in this embodiment, the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data) are read in this order. The fact that the data is lower data (EXT data) means that one effect control command is read out as a set of upper data (MODE data) and lower data (EXT data)), and the effect control CPU 90101 The upper data (MODE data) read out first is written in the analysis buffer (upper level) (step S90728), and the lower data (EXT data) read this time is written in the analysis buffer (lower level) (step S90729). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a write completion flag indicating that the writing to the analysis buffer is completed by setting one effect control command with the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data). (Step S90730). Then, the process proceeds to step S90732.

  If the read data is upper data (MODE data) (Y in step S90727: that is, if the lower data (EXT data) has not been read yet), the effect control CPU 90101 resets the write completion flag ( Step S90731). Then, the process proceeds to step S90732.

  By executing the processing of steps S90727 to S90731, in this embodiment, each time the effect control command is read byte by byte, the higher-order data (MODE data) and the lower-order data (EXT data) are individually converted into each analysis buffer. Rather than controlling to store in (analysis buffer (upper) and analysis buffer (lower)), the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data) are both collected together as a set. Control is performed so that data is stored in each analysis buffer (analysis buffer (upper) and analysis buffer (lower)).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not reading of all effect control commands stored in the transfer buffer has been completed (step S90732). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90101 determines, for example, whether or not the value of the read pointer of the transfer buffer has caught up with the value of the write pointer. It can be determined that reading of all effect control commands stored in the buffer is completed. If an unread effect control command remains in the transfer buffer, the process returns to step S90725, and the effect control CPU 90101 executes the processes of steps S90725 to S90731 again.

  If reading of all effect control commands stored in the transfer buffer has been completed, effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not the writing completion flag is set (step S90733). If the write completion flag is set (Y in step S90733), the transfer buffer transfer process is terminated. If the writing completion flag has not been set (N in step S90733), only the upper data (MODE data) has been read for the effect control command last read from the transfer buffer, and the lower data (EXT data) has not been read yet. This means that reading has not been performed and transfer to the analysis buffer has not been completed. Therefore, in this case, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the read pointer and returns it to 1 (step S90734), and proceeds to step S90735.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not reading of all effect control commands stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 has been completed (step S90735). If an unread effect control command remains in the reception register, effect control CPU 90101 returns to step S90721 and repeats the processing from step S90721 onward. If there remains no unread performance control command in the reception register, the transfer buffer transfer process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, as soon as an effect control command is received, it is transferred to the transfer buffer due to the occurrence of a serial reception interrupt. In most cases, however, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 90560 rises earlier than the effect control microcomputer 90100, and the settings of the effect control microcomputer 90100 are set. It may happen that an effect control command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560 and stored in the reception register before completion. Even in such a case, when the processing of step S90735 is executed, the presentation control command is first received after the activation control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the serial reception interrupt is generated this time. In addition to the received effect control commands, all effect control commands including the effect control commands that have already been received and stored in the reception register before the start of the effect control microcomputer 90100 are read out and transferred to the transfer buffer. Transferred.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the analysis buffer transfer process (step S90711) executed in the timer interrupt process. In the analysis buffer transfer process, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether there is an unread effect control command in the transfer buffer (step S90741). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the value of the read pointer in the transfer buffer has caught up with the value of the write pointer. It can be determined that reading of all effect control commands stored in the buffer has been completed, otherwise it can be determined that there is an unread effect control command.

  If there is an unread effect control command (Y in step S90741), the effect control CPU 90101 reads the effect control command (1-byte data) from the transfer buffer (step S90742). In this case, the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the effect control command (1-byte upper data (MODE data) or lower data (EXT data)) read in step S90742 in, for example, one of the data registers. Keep it. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 adds 1 to the value of the read pointer of the transfer buffer (step S90743).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the read data is higher-order data (MODE data) of the effect control command (step S90744). Specifically, in this embodiment, the higher order data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to a value in the range of 80 (H) to FF (H), and the lower order data (EXT data) is It is configured to always have a value in the range of 00 (H) to 7F (H) (see FIG. 52). Therefore, in step S90744, if the most significant bit of the read data is “1”, the effect control CPU 90101 can determine that the data is the higher data (MODE data), and the most significant bit of the read data is “ If it is “0”, it can be determined that the data is lower-order data (EXT data).

  If the read data is the lower data (EXT data) (N in step S90744: That is, in this embodiment, the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data) are read in this order). The fact that the data is lower data (EXT data) means that one effect control command is read out as a set of upper data (MODE data) and lower data (EXT data), and the effect control CPU 90101 The upper data (MODE data) read first is written in the analysis buffer (upper) (step S90745), and the lower data (EXT data) read this time is written in the analysis buffer (lower) (step S90746). In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a writing completion flag (step S90747) and returns to step S90741.

  If the read data is the upper data (MODE data) (Y in step S90744: that is, if the lower data (EXT data) has not been read yet), the effect control CPU 90101 resets the write completion flag ( Step S90748) returns to Step S90741.

  Then, the processes of steps S90741 to S90748 are repeatedly executed until the processes for all the effect control commands stored in the transfer buffer are completed.

  If there is no unread effect control command (N in step S90741), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the writing completion flag is set (step S90749). If the write completion flag is set (Y in step S90749), the analysis buffer transfer process is terminated. If the writing completion flag is not set (N in step S90749), only the upper data (MODE data) has been read for the effect control command last read from the transfer buffer, and the lower data (EXT data) has not been read yet. This means that reading has not been performed and transfer to the analysis buffer has not been completed. Therefore, in this case, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the read pointer and returns it to 1 (step S90750), and ends the analysis buffer transfer process.

  Note that the effect control commands stored in the analysis buffer in the analysis buffer transfer process shown in FIG. 74 and the processes in steps S90725 to S90734 shown in FIG. 73 are analyzed in the command analysis process (see step S90704). That is, the effect control CPU 90101 reads and analyzes the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 and stored in the analysis buffer in the command analysis process, and sets a flag corresponding to the analyzed effect control command. The processing to do is performed.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs one of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S90801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S90801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S90802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S90803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S90803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the variable time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S90805).

  In-round processing (step S90805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S90807).

  Post-round processing (step S90806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S90807): In the effect display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  When the pre-reading notice effect is configured to be executable based on a pre-reading determination command such as a symbol designation command or a variable category command (see FIG. 53) received from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control CPU 90101 In the effect control process, a prefetching notice effect process for executing a prefetching notice effect based on the received symbol designation command or the variation category command may be executed. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 90101 stops the display of chance symbols and the like over a plurality of changes, changes the background image, or counts down as the pre-reading notice effect. A continuous effect may be executed, such as performing an effect in such a manner, or a hold notice effect that displays the hold display in a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the control means (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90100) that performs control based on the received command (in this example, the production control command), and the reception The first storage area (in this example, a reception register included in the serial communication circuit 90115) in which the received command is stored and the second storage area (in this example, in the internal RAM 90112) in which the received command is temporarily stored are provided. And a third storage area (in this example, an analysis buffer provided in the external SDRAM 90116) in which the received command is finally stored. Further, the control means reads the command stored in the first storage area and stores it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt (in this example, a serial reception interrupt) that occurs every time a command is received. The command stored in the second storage area is read out and stored in the third storage area based on a timer interrupt generated every predetermined period (1 ms in this example). Then, the control means analyzes the command stored in the third storage area (in this example, in the command analysis process (see step S90704), the effect control command stored in the analysis buffer is analyzed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the missed command when a large number of commands are received.

  Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, with respect to the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, the effect control command is directly received from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 every time a timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms. It was read and transferred to the analysis buffer. Then, even if the production control command is received and stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115, the production control command is not read from the reception register until a timer interrupt occurs every 1 ms. If a large amount of presentation control commands are received in the meantime, the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 may be exceeded, and the presentation control commands may be missed. In particular, in a gaming machine that is configured to be able to simultaneously display the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the start winning determination occurs at the same timing as the fluctuation start, A command at the start of fluctuation such as a pattern command or display result designation command and a prefetch determination command such as a pattern designation command or fluctuation category command may be sent in large quantities at the same timing. There is a possibility that the total number of effect control commands to be transmitted exceeds 20, the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 overflows, and the effect control command may be missed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, a transfer buffer is provided in the built-in RAM 90112 separately from the analysis buffer, and the serial communication circuit 90115 is immediately provided every time a serial reception interrupt occurs. The effect control command is transferred from the reception register to the transfer buffer, and thereafter, the effect control command is further transferred from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer at every timer interrupt of 1 ms. With this configuration, in this embodiment, when a large amount of presentation control commands are received, a situation where the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 overflows can be prevented, and the loss of presentation control commands can be reduced. ing.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the second storage area is provided in the RAM built in the control means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 70, a transfer buffer is provided in the built-in RAM 90112. ). Therefore, the command can be transferred from the first storage area to the second storage area at high speed. That is, since it is only necessary to access the internal RAM connected by the internal bus, data transfer can be performed at high speed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the second storage area has a larger storage capacity than the first storage area, and the third storage area has a larger storage capacity than the second storage area (this example) As shown in FIG. 70, the capacity of the receiving register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is 16 bytes, whereas the capacity of the transfer buffer is as large as 128 bytes. The capacity of the lower order is 256 bytes, which is larger). Therefore, it is possible to reduce missed commands by increasing the storage capacity of the transfer destination storage area.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the capacity of the command stored in the second storage area reaches the maximum value of the storage capacity of the second storage area, regardless of the occurrence of the timer interrupt, The command stored in the second storage area is read and stored in the third storage area (in this example, as shown in FIG. 73, in the transfer buffer transfer process, if the transfer buffer is full, step S90725 is executed). The processing of S90734 is executed, and the effect control command is transferred from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer). For this reason, when the second storage area becomes full, it is possible to reduce the missed command by moving the command to the third storage area even a little.

  In this embodiment, the capacity of the transfer buffer is 128 bytes, and a maximum of 64 presentation control commands can be stored, and it is considered that a situation where the transfer buffer becomes full rarely occurs. Therefore, the processing of steps S90725 to S90734 may not be provided in the transfer buffer transfer processing shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, when the transfer buffer is full, all effect control commands in which the upper data (MODE data) and the lower data (EXT data) are stored as a set are transferred from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer. Although the case of transfer is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and only some effect control commands may be transferred from the transfer buffer to the analysis buffer. Even in such a configuration, when the transfer buffer is full, it is possible to reduce the loss of the presentation control command to some extent.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the third storage area includes a first area for storing the upper data of the command (in this example, an analysis buffer (upper)) and a second area for storing the lower data of the command. (In this example, the analysis buffer (lower order)). Then, the upper data of the command read from the second storage area is stored in the first area, and the lower data of the command read from the second storage area is stored in the second area (see steps S90745 and S90746 in FIG. 74). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the missed command in the second storage area. Further, the data transfer speed can be improved by increasing the data flow path at the time of transfer by dividing the area for storing the upper data of the command and the area for storing the lower data.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the effect control command is transferred from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the transfer buffer, it is transferred to the common transfer buffer as it is without dividing it into upper data and lower data. It is configured to do. With this configuration, in this embodiment, the processing load is prevented from increasing when transferring to the transfer buffer for each serial reception interrupt.

  In this embodiment, when a serial reception interrupt occurs, an effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is immediately read and transferred to the transfer buffer. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, in this embodiment, the receiving register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is also provided with a capacity of 16 bytes, and can store a maximum of eight effect control commands, and the capacity of the transfer buffer is a certain margin of 128 bytes. Therefore, based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of serial reception interrupts, the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 may be read and transferred to the transfer buffer. Good. Hereinafter, a modified example in which an effect control command is transferred to the transfer buffer based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of serial reception interrupts will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the transfer buffer transfer process executed when a serial reception interrupt occurs. In the modification shown in FIG. 76, in the transfer buffer transfer process, the effect control CPU 90101 first adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter for counting the number of occurrences of serial reception interrupts (step S90751). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not the value of the interrupt counter after the addition has reached a predetermined number (10 in this example) (step S90752). In this embodiment, the predetermined number is 10. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, whether the value of the interrupt counter reaches 5 or 15 as the predetermined number. You may make it confirm. At least in this embodiment, since the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is 16 bytes, the predetermined number is set to a value equal to or less than the value corresponding to the capacity of the reception register (16 in this example). It only has to be defined.

  If the value of the interrupt counter does not reach the predetermined number, the transfer buffer transfer process is terminated as it is without proceeding to the processes after step S90753. If the value of the interrupt counter reaches the predetermined number, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the value of the interrupt counter (step S90753). Then, the process proceeds to steps S90721 to S90723, and a process of transferring the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the transfer buffer is executed. In FIG. 76, the processes in steps S90721 to S90723 are the same as those shown in FIG. In FIG. 76, the processes in steps S90724 to S90735 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 76, the command stored in the first storage area is read out to the second storage area based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of reception interrupts (10 times in this example). (In this example, as shown in FIG. 76, when it is determined as Y in Step S90752, the process proceeds to Steps S90721 to S90723, and the effect control command stored in the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is stored. Execute processing to transfer to the transfer buffer). Therefore, the processing time for each interrupt can be shortened by performing the process of transferring the command from the first storage area to the second storage area only once every time a reception interrupt occurs a predetermined number of times. As described above, in this example, the capacity of the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 is 16 bytes, and the capacity of the transfer buffer is 128 bytes. There is no problem even with data transfer for each interrupt.

  In the above embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 90100 stores the production control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560, it is temporarily transferred from the reception register of the serial communication circuit 90115 to the delivery buffer. Although the case of finally transferring to the analysis buffer has been shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when storing a payout control command that the game control microcomputer 90560 and the payout control microcomputer mutually transmit / receive, the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied, and the received payout control command is transferred to the serial communication circuit. It may be configured that the data is temporarily transferred from the reception register to the transfer buffer and finally transferred to the analysis buffer. For example, when the VDP 90109 stores the command received from the effect control microcomputer 90100, the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied, and the received command is temporarily transferred from the reception register of the serial communication circuit to the transfer buffer. The data may be transferred and finally transferred to the analysis buffer.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode, such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses a first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called first in the case where the reach has been reached, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 selects a specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit on which other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027 and the like) are mounted are mounted. Two boards, such as two production control boards, may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. However, the game control microcomputer 90560 has another board (for example, FIG. 48). The sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver board 9035 shown in FIG. 6 or a sound / lamp board having a function by a circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and a function by a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035) The control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 on the effect control board 9080 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 909. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above embodiment, and the sound output board 9070, the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the substrate 9035 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set when a medal is inserted, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible. For example, for a slot machine, similarly, an effect control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the effect control microcomputer, or a payout control command is transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. Since commands are transmitted to the VDP from the production control microcomputer, the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied when receiving these commands, and the received commands are received by the serial communication circuit. A configuration may be such that the data is once transferred from the register to the transfer buffer and finally transferred to the analysis buffer.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine that is controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game is based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit and the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, or a plurality of types of ordinary symbols “O” and “X” are displayed. Although the case where the symbol is variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown, the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the game is a big hit and determines whether or not the variable pattern type is awarded (pre-reading decision), and shows a command (designation designation command) indicating the result of the winning decision. , A variation category command) is transmitted, and the pre-play notice effect may be configured to be executable on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. For example, the determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may be performed on the production control microcomputer 90100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R ′) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2 ′) extracted at the time of starting winning. In other words, the presentation control microcomputer 90100 side may be configured to make a determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) based on a random number value designated by these commands.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 560 Game control microcomputer, 100 Production control microcomputer, 9 Production display device, 901 Pachinko game machine, 908a 1st special symbol display, 908b 2nd special design display, 909 Production display device, 909a First hold memory display unit, 909b Second hold memory display unit, 9013 First start winning port, 9014 Second start winning port, 9020 Special variable winning ball device, 9031 Game control board (main board), 9051 Serial communication circuit , 9056 CPU, 90560 game control microcomputer, 9080 effect control board, 90100 effect control microcomputer, 90101 effect control CPU, 90109 VDP, 90111 internal ROM, 90112 internal RAM, 90114 interrupt controller Over La, 90,115 serial communication circuit, 90116 SDRAM

Claims (1)

Specific production execution means capable of executing a specific production that suggests a transition to an advantageous state advantageous to the player over a plurality of variations;
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing different types of predetermined effects;
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect as to whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state;
And control means for controlling on the basis of the command,
It receives a plurality of command data constituting a command, comprising: a command receiving means for storing in the first storage area, and
The control means includes
First storage control means for reading the command data stored in the first storage area and storing it in the second storage area based on a reception interrupt generated each time the command receiving means receives command data ;
Second storage control means for reading out the command data stored in the second storage area and storing it in the third storage area on the basis of a timer interrupt generated every predetermined period;
Analyzing means for analyzing command data stored in the third storage area,
The second storage control means determines the type of command data read from the second storage area, and sets the command data to an area according to the type of command data in the third storage area based on the determination result. Store and
The second storage area has a larger storage capacity than the first storage area,
The third storage area has a larger storage capacity than the second storage area,
The reception interrupt is set higher in priority than the timer interrupt,
The predetermined effect execution means includes
The execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started in response to the execution of the specific effect, and corresponds to the specific effect in response to the end of the notification effect executed after the specific effect. A first pattern for ending execution of the predetermined effect of the type;
The execution of the predetermined effect of a type corresponding to the specific effect is started in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the transition to the advantageous state is performed during the execution of the notification effect performed after the specific effect. gaming machine, wherein a second pattern of changing the type of the predetermined effect in response to the special effect suggests is executed, it is possible to perform.